Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Use this manual if you encounter any problems, or have any questions about your product.

Tracking On + AF On

You can track and keep focusing on the subject for as long as you hold down the custom key.
[Tracking On + AF On] is assigned to the AF-ON button in the default settings.

Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)

This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the
website when you set up your camera. (Another window will open.)

ILCE-7C lens compatibility information

This website provides the lens compatibility information. (Another window will open.)

How to use the “Help Guide”

Names of parts/Icons and indicators

Names of parts

Front side

Rear side

Top side

Side view

Bottom

Basic operations

Using the control wheel

Using MENU items

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

How to use the Quick Navi screen

How to use the keyboard

1
Icons and indicators

List of icons on the monitor

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Preparing the camera

Checking the camera and the supplied items

FE 28-60mm F4-5.6

Charging the battery pack

Inserting/removing the battery pack

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera

Charging by connecting to a computer

Battery life and number of recordable images

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on charging the battery pack

Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Inserting/removing a memory card

Memory cards that can be used

Notes on memory card

Attaching/removing a lens

Attaching accessories

Mount Adaptor

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

Setting language, date and time

In-Camera Guide

Shooting

Shooting still images

2
Focusing

Focus Mode

Auto focus

Focus Area

Focus Area Limit

Phase detection AF

Focus Standard

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

AF/MF control

AF w/ shutter (still image)

AF On

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

Focus Hold

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Frame Color

Pre-AF (still image)

Eye-Start AF (still image)

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

AF Illuminator (still image)

AF Area Auto Clear

Disp. cont. AF area

Circ. of Focus Point

AF Frame Move Amt

AF Micro Adj.

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

3
Manual focus

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Focus Magnifier

MF Assist (still image)

Focus Magnif. Time

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Peaking Setting

Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Drive Mode

Cont. Shooting

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Self-timer

Self-timer(Cont)

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

Indicator during bracket shooting

WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Bracket Settings

Interval shooting

Interval Shoot Func.

Using touch functions

Touch Operation

Touch Panel/Pad

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Touch Pad Settings

4
Selecting still image size/image quality

File Format (still image)

RAW File Type (still image)

JPEG Quality (still image)

JPEG Image Size (still image)

Aspect Ratio (still image)

APS-C/Super 35mm

Angle of view

Selecting a shooting mode

List of mode dial function

Intelligent Auto

About Scene Recognition

Program Auto

Aperture Priority

Shutter Priority

Manual Exposure

Bulb shooting

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Movie: Exposure Mode

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

Controlling the exposure/metering modes

Exposure Comp.

Reset EV Comp.

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

Exposure Set. Guide

Exposure step

Metering Mode

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Spot Metering Point

AE lock

5
 AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Exposure Std. Adjust

Exp.comp.set

Zebra Setting

Correcting brightness and contrast automatically

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

Auto HDR

Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO Setting: ISO

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

Using the zoom

The zoom features available with this product

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

Zoom Setting

About zoom scale

Zoom Ring Rotate

White balance

White Balance

Priority Set in AWB

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

Setting how to process images

Creative Style

Picture Effect

Color Space (still image)

Shutter settings

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Release w/o Lens

Release w/o Card

6
 Silent Shooting (still image)

Reducing blur

SteadyShot

SteadyShot Settings

Lens compensation

Lens Comp.

Noise reduction

Long Exposure NR (still image)

High ISO NR (still image)

Face detection

Regist. Faces Priority

Face Registration (New Registration)

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

Face Registration (Delete)

Using the flash

Using flash (sold separately)

Red Eye Reduction

Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

FEL lock

External Flash Set.

Wireless Flash

Recording movies

Shooting movies

Movie w/ shutter

Movie recording formats

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

S&Q Settings

7
Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

Proxy Recording

Audio Recording

Audio Level Display

Audio Rec Level

Audio Out Timing

Wind Noise Reduct.

Picture Profile

Gamma Disp. Assist

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

AF Transition Speed (movie)

AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)

TC/UB Settings

TC/UB Disp. Switch

Marker Display (movie)

Marker Settings (movie)

4K Output Select (movie)

Video Light Mode

Viewing

Viewing images

Playing back still images

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Playing back movies

Volume Settings

8
 Photo Capture

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Display as Group

Cont. PB for Interval

PB Speed for Interval

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Protecting data

Protecting images (Protect)

Setting Rating function

Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Designating images for printing (DPOF)

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

Deleting images

Deleting a displayed image

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

Delete confirm.

Viewing images on a TV

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

Customizing the camera

Customization features of the camera

Registering frequently used functions

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Dial/Wheel Setup

Av/Tv Rotate

9
 Dial / Wheel Lock

Function Ring(Lens)

Customizing MENU (My Menu)

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item

Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

Checking images before/after recording

Auto Review

Aperture Preview

Shot. Result Preview

Live View Display

Monitor/viewfinder settings

Grid Line

FINDER/MONITOR

Monitor Brightness

Viewfinder Bright.

Finder Color Temp.

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display Quality

Bright Monitoring

Memory card settings

Format

File/Folder Settings (still image)

File Settings (movie)

Display Media Info.

Select REC Folder

New Folder

10
 Recover Image DB

Camera settings

Audio signals

Power Save Start Time

Auto Power OFF Temp.

NTSC/PAL Selector

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

USB Connection

USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

Language

Date/Time Setup

Area Setting

Copyright Info

Version

IPTC Information

Write Serial Number

Initializing the camera

Setting Reset

Using network functions

Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Imaging Edge Mobile

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

11
 Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

Transferring images to a Smartphone

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)

Reading location information from a smartphone

Location Info. Link Set.

Using a remote commander with Bluetooth communication

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Transferring images to a computer

FTP Transfer Func.

Changing the network settings

Airplane Mode

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

Bluetooth Settings

Edit Device Name

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Security(IPsec)

Reset Network Set.

Using a computer

Recommended computer environment

12
Connecting/disconnecting the camera

Connecting to a computer

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Managing/editing images on a computer

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop)

Importing images to the computer

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

List of MENU items

Using MENU items

Camera Settings1

File Format (still image)

RAW File Type (still image)

JPEG Quality (still image)

JPEG Image Size (still image)

Aspect Ratio (still image)

APS-C/Super 35mm

Long Exposure NR (still image)

High ISO NR (still image)

Color Space (still image)

Lens Comp.

Drive Mode

Bracket Settings

Interval Shoot Func.

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-S

13
Priority Set in AF-C

Focus Area

Focus Area Limit

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

AF Illuminator (still image)

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Pre-AF (still image)

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Frame Color

AF Area Auto Clear

Disp. cont. AF area

Circ. of Focus Point

AF Frame Move Amt

AF Micro Adj.

Exposure Comp.

Reset EV Comp.

ISO Setting: ISO

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

Metering Mode

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Spot Metering Point

Exposure step

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Exposure Std. Adjust

14
 Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

Exp.comp.set

Wireless Flash

Red Eye Reduction

External Flash Set.

White Balance

Priority Set in AWB

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

Auto HDR

Creative Style

Picture Effect

Picture Profile

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif. Time

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

MF Assist (still image)

Peaking Setting

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Face Registration (New Registration)

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

Face Registration (Delete)

Regist. Faces Priority

Camera Settings2

Movie: Exposure Mode

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

15
S&Q Settings

Proxy Recording

AF Transition Speed (movie)

AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

Audio Level Display

Audio Out Timing

Wind Noise Reduct.

Marker Display (movie)

Marker Settings (movie)

Video Light Mode

Movie w/ shutter

Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

Silent Shooting (still image)

Release w/o Lens

Release w/o Card

SteadyShot

SteadyShot Settings

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

Zoom Setting

Zoom Ring Rotate

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

FINDER/MONITOR

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Zebra Setting

Grid Line

Exposure Set. Guide

16
 Live View Display

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Auto Review

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Dial/Wheel Setup

Av/Tv Rotate

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

Function Ring(Lens)

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Dial / Wheel Lock

Audio signals

Network

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

FTP Transfer Func.

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Airplane Mode

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

Bluetooth Settings

Location Info. Link Set.

17
 Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Edit Device Name

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Security(IPsec)

Reset Network Set.

Playback

Protecting images (Protect)

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

Photo Capture

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Cont. PB for Interval

PB Speed for Interval

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Display as Group

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Setup

Monitor Brightness

Viewfinder Bright.

Finder Color Temp.

Gamma Disp. Assist

Volume Settings

18
Delete confirm.

Display Quality

Power Save Start Time

Auto Power OFF Temp.

NTSC/PAL Selector

Cleaning Mode

Touch Operation

Touch Panel/Pad

Touch Pad Settings

TC/UB Settings

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

4K Output Select (movie)

USB Connection

USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

Language

Date/Time Setup

Area Setting

IPTC Information

Copyright Info

Write Serial Number

Format

Select REC Folder

New Folder

File/Folder Settings (still image)

19
 File Settings (movie)

Recover Image DB

Display Media Info.

Version

Setting Reset

My Menu

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item

Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

Precautions/This product

Precautions

On cleaning

Cleaning the image sensor

Cleaning Mode

Number of recordable images

Recordable movie times

Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad

License

Specifications

Trademarks

List of default setting values

If you have problems

Troubleshooting

Warning messages

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

20
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

How to use the “Help Guide”

The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual onscreen display
of your model.)

Hint
The “Startup Guide” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to the
“Startup Guide” in combination with this “Help Guide.”

Finding your desired information

Method A: Searching by keyword

Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.

Method B: Viewing the table of contents

Select a heading from the table of contents to display the description page.

Screen displayed on a computer

Screen displayed on a smartphone

21
 Viewing information about related features

“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.

Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”

To print all the pages, click the [ Printable PDF] button in the upper right corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.

Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)

To print only the page currently being displayed, click the [ Print] button at the top of that page. When the printing
screen appears, specify your printer.

22
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

23
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Front side

1. ON/OFF (Power) switch/Shutter button

2. AF illuminator/Self-timer lamp
3. Lens release button
4. Microphone
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.

When the lens is removed

5. Mounting index
6. Image sensor*
7. Mount
8. Lens contacts*

* Do not directly touch these parts.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

24
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rear side

1. Viewfinder
2. Eye sensor
3. Diopter-adjustment dial
Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder.

4. Monitor (For touch operation: Touch panel/Touch pad)

You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.

(A): Approx. 176°

(B): Approx. 270°

You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

25
 5. MENU button
6. Control dial
7. For shooting: AF-ON (AF On) button
[Tracking On + AF On] is assigned in the default settings.
For viewing: (Enlarge) button
8. For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by pressing this button.

9. Control wheel
10. For shooting: C button (Custom button)
For viewing: (Delete) button
11. (Playback) button

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

26
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Top side

1. Mode dial
2. Exposure compensation dial
3. MOVIE (Movie) button
4. Multi Interface Shoe*
Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when
the accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.

5. Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The (Image sensor position mark)
shows the location of the image sensor. When you measure the exact distance between the camera and the
subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.

If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.

6. Speaker

* For details on compatible accessories for the multi interface shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility. Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufactures’ accessories are not guaranteed.

27
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

28
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Side view

1. Hooks for shoulder strap

Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.

2. (N-Mark)
This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an NFC-enabled Smartphone.

29
 NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

3. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external
microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.

4. Memory card slot

Supports SD cards only (compatible with UHS-I and UHS-II)

5. HDMI micro jack

6. (Headphones) jack
7. Charge lamp
8. USB Type-C terminal
9. Access lamp

Notes on the terminal cover

Ensure that the terminal cover is closed before use.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

30
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bottom

1. Battery insertion slot

2. Lock lever
3. Battery cover
4. Tripod socket hole
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

31
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using the control wheel

You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is
determined when you press the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting), (Image Index), / (Drive Mode), and ISO (ISO) functions are assigned to the
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected functions to the left/right/bottom
side and the center of the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.

Related Topic
Focus Standard
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

32
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.

2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.

3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center of the control wheel to confirm your selection.

Hint
You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom
Key], and then pressing that key.

Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu

33
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

34
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode ( Custom Key), movie
shooting mode ( Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).

Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.

You can assign functions to the following keys.

1. MOVIE Button
2. AF-ON Button
3. Fn/ Button
4. Center Button /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button
5. C Button

For details on setting custom keys, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/custom.php

Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the C button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key]. If you want to assign
a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key].

2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [C Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.

3 Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.

35
 If you press the C button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and the
camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the C button.

Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.

Related Topic
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

36
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.

For details on setting the function menu, refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/function.php

Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

1 Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and
then press the Fn (Function) button.

2 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

37
 3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].

2. Select (Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
3. Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.

(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

38
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

How to use the Quick Navi screen

The Quick Navi screen is a function optimized for shooting with the viewfinder, that lets you control settings directly.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor].

2 Place a (check) mark on [For viewfinder] and then select [Enter].

3 Press the DISP on the control wheel to set the screen mode to [For viewfinder].

4 Press the Fn button to switch to the Quick Navi screen.

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual
displays.

Auto mode

P/A/S/M mode

5 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

6 Turn the control wheel to select the desired setting.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

39
Select the desired function in step 5, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

Note
When using [Creative Style], etc., some of the setup tasks can only be accomplished on a dedicated screen.

Related Topic
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

40
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

How to use the keyboard

When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.

Move the cursor on desired key using the control wheel, then press the center to enter.

1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
1. Press the key for “abc” once to display “a.”
2. Press “ ” (the right-pointing arrow in the “Move cursor” area, marked as No.5).
3. Press the key for “abc” twice to display “b.”
4. Press the key for “def” once to display “d.”
4. Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
5. Move cursor
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
6. Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7. (upward-pointing arrow)
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
8. (space)
Enters a space.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

41
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

List of icons on the monitor

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

Icons on the shooting screen

Monitor mode

Viewfinder mode

1. Shooting mode/Scene recognition

P P* A S M
Shooting mode

Register number

Scene Recognition icons

2. Camera settings
NO CARD
Memory card status
100/1 h 30 m
Remaining number of recordable images/Recordable time of movies

Writing data / Number of images left to write

Aspect ratio of still images

42
24M / 21M / 20M / 16M / 10M / 9.2M / 8.7M / 6.9M / 6.0M / 5.3M / 5.1M / 4.0M / 2.6M / 2.3M / 2.2M / 1.7M
Image size of still images
RAW
RAW recording (compressed/uncompressed)
X.FINE FINE STD
JPEG Quality
XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD
File format of movies

Record setting of movies

120p 60p 30p 24p 100p 50p 25p
Frame rate of movies

Proxy Recording
120fps 60fps 30fps 15fps 8fps 4fps 100fps 50fps 25fps 12fps 6fps 3fps 2fps 1fps
Frame rate for slow/quick motion shooting

APS-C/Super 35mm

Flash charge in progress

Setting Effect OFF

AF Illuminator

Flickering detected

SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning

SteadyS. Focal Len. / Camera shake warning

Smart Zoom/ClearImage Zoom/Digital Zoom

PC remote

Bright Monitoring

Silent Shooting

Remote control

Status of FTP connection and FTP transfer

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi

No audio recording of movies

Wind Noise Reduct.

Copyright information writing on

IPTC information writing on

43
 Gamma Disp. Assist

Touch Shutter

Focus Cancel

Tracking Cancel
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]

NFC active

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Connected to smartphone / Not connected to smartphone

Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

USB Streaming: Not Connect / USB Streaming: Standby / USB Streaming: Output
USB streaming status
3. Battery

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

4. Shooting settings

Drive Mode

Flash Mode /Wireless Flash/Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp.

Focus Mode

Focus Area

File Format

Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer /Auto HDR

44
 +3 +3 +3
Creative Style /Contrast, saturation, and sharpness

Picture Effect

Face/Eye Priority in AF
–
Picture Profile
5. Focus indicator/exposure settings

Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400
ISO AUTO
ISO400
ISO sensitivity

AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock

6. Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing

Guide display for My Dial

Control wheel function

Control dial function

Bracket indicator

Spot metering area

Exposure Setting Guide

Shutter speed indicator

Aperture indicator

Histogram

Digital level gauge

45
 STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)

Audio Level Display

REC Control
00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds. frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit

Icons on the playback screen

Single-image playback

Histogram display

1. Basic information

View Mode

IPTC Information

Rating

Protect
DPOF
DPOF set
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode

NFC active

46
 Remaining battery

Display as Group

Proxy movie included

Status of FTP transfer

2. Camera settings
Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen.”

3. Shooting settings

Picture Effect error

Auto HDR error

35mm
Lens focal length
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)

Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen” for other icons displayed in this area.

4. Image information

Latitude/longitude information

Copyright information exists for image

2020 -1-1 10:37PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
File name of movie

Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

47
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

You can change the display contents on the screen.

1 Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.

To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while looking into the viewfinder.
Each time you press the DISP button, the screen display changes.
The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.

During shooting (Monitor)

Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All Info.

During shooting (Viewfinder)

Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level

During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)

Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.

48
 If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram
display (overexposed/underexposed warning).
The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].

Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance. It shows darker
toward the left and brighter toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.

(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness

Note
The viewfinder display and the monitor display for shooting can be set separately. Look through the viewfinder to set the display
settings for the viewfinder.

The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.

The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene

In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.

Hint
The following are not displayed in the default settings.
Graphic Display
Monitor Off
Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)

To change the display modes that are switched when you press the DISP button, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) →
[DISP Button] and change the setting.

49
Related Topic
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

50
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with (check mark) are available.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.

For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.

Monitor Off*:
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

51
Related Topic
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

52
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Checking the camera and the supplied items

The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.

Camera (1)
AC Adaptor (1)
The type of the AC Adaptor may differ depending on the country/region.

Power cord (mains lead) (1)*

* Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your country/region.
NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)

USB Type-C cable (1)

Shoulder Strap (1)

Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Startup Guide (1)
Reference Guide (1)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

53
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FE 28-60mm F4-5.6

1. Focusing ring
2. Zooming ring
3. Focal-length scale

When shooting, rotate the zooming ring until the focal-length index comes within the focal-length scale range (A) to
extend the lens.

4. Lens mount rubber ring

5. Mounting index
6. Lens contacts*
7. Lens retraction index
After shooting, rotate the zooming ring until the lens retraction index reaches the focal-length index to retract the
lens.

8. Focal-length index

* Do not touch this part directly.

Specifications
Focal length: 28 – 60 mm
35mm equivalent focal length*1: 42 – 90 mm
Lens groups-elements: 7 – 8
Angle of view 1*2: 75° – 40°
Angle of view 2*2: 54° – 27°
Minimum focus*3: 0.3 – 0.45 m (0.99 – 1.48 ft.)
Maximum magnification: 0.16×
Minimum aperture: f/22 – f/32
Filter diameter: 40.5 mm
Dimensions (max. diameter × height): Approx. 66.6 mm × 45 mm (Approx. 2 5/8 inches × 1 13/16 inches)
Mass: Approx. 167 g (Approx. 5.9 oz.)
SteadyShot: No

*1 This is the equivalent focal length in 35mm format when mounted on an Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera equipped with an APS-C sized
image sensor.
*2 Angle of view 1 is the value for 35mm cameras, and angle of view 2 is the value for Interchangeable Lens Digital Cameras equipped with an
APS-C sized image sensor.

54
*3 Minimum focus is the distance from the image sensor to the subject.

Supplied items
Lens (1), Front Lens Cap (1), Rear Lens Cap (1)

Note
If you use this lens attached to a camera other than this model, an alert may not appear on the monitor or the viewfinder even
when the focal-length index is outside the range of the focal-length scale. In such cases, the camera shoots images as follows.
The aperture value is locked at F14.
The focus mode is locked to manual focusing, but you cannot adjust the focus using the focusing ring.
The ending of the lens name in the Exif information is recorded as "(Retract)" or "F0" when the image is shot with the lens
retracted.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

55
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Inserting/removing the battery pack

1 Open the battery cover by sliding the switch on it.

2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.

3 Close the cover, and then slide the switch towards the LOCK side.

To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.

56
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

57
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera

1 Turn the power off.

2 Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor (supplied) using the USB cable, and
connect the AC Adaptor to the wall outlet (wall socket).

Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range

Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 285 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.

Note
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from
the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.

If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), this indicates that
charging is temporarily stopped because the temperature is outside the recommended range. When the temperature gets back
within the appropriate range, the charging resumes. We recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of
between 10°C to 30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).

Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.
If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp
turns off.

If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the wall outlet (wall socket) and you will be able to operate the camera.
However, the battery pack will not be charged.

When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge lamp may flash
quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and
then re-insert it to recharge.
58
 Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully charged.
Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.

When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket).

Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, USB cables (supplied) and AC Adaptors (supplied).

Related Topic
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

59
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Charging by connecting to a computer

The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a USB cable.

1 Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.

Note
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.

Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.

The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.

Related Topic
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

60
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Battery life and number of recordable images

Number of images when shooting still images

Screen mode Approx. 740 images

Viewfinder mode Approx. 680 images

Battery life when shooting movies (Actual shooting)

Screen mode Approx. 140 min.

Viewfinder mode Approx. 140 min.

Battery life when shooting movies (Continuous shooting)

Screen mode Approx. 215 min.

Viewfinder mode Approx. 220 min.

The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony SDXC memory card (U3) (sold separately)
Using a FE 28-60mm F4-5.6 lens

The numbers for “Shooting (still images)” are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.

The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

61
62
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Use the supplied AC adaptor to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.

1 Insert the battery pack into the camera.

2 Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a USB cable and the AC adaptor (supplied).

Note
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make sure that the icon that shows that
powering via USB is in progress ( ) is displayed on the monitor.

Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.

Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card may be damaged.

As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor.

Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor.

Do not remove the USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). Before you remove the USB cable, turn off
the camera.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied
from a wall outlet (wall socket).

When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

63
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on using the battery pack

Be sure to use only battery packs specified for this product.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.

Charging the battery pack

Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,
overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB
cable from the camera and then reinsert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be effectively charged in temperatures outside this range.
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop’s battery
charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the laptop computer for too long.
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a computer while this product is
connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product
and the computer before performing the above operations.
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or disconnect the USB cable
from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.

Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.

A: Battery level high

B: Battery exhausted

It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.

Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.

64
 The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.

How to store the battery pack

To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.

On battery life

The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time
to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

65
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Notes on charging the battery pack

The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other electronic devices. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the
same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product and the wall outlet (wall socket), this
indicates that charging has stopped temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status
automatically when the temperature is outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature
returns to the appropriate range, charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We recommend charging
the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

66
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Inserting/removing a memory card

Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the product.

1 Open the memory card cover by sliding the switch on it.

2 Insert the memory card.

Insert the memory card with the terminal side facing toward you, until it clicks into place.
This camera only supports SD memory cards (compatible with UHS-II). This camera does not support Memory
Stick media.

3 Close the cover, and then slide the switch to the locked position.

Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.

67
To remove the memory card
Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Format

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

68
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Memory cards that can be used

This camera only supports SD memory cards (UHS-II compatible). When using microSD memory cards with this camera,
be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.
Recording format Supported memory card

Still image SD/SDHC/SDXC card

XAVC S 4K 60Mbps*
XAVC S HD 50Mbps or lower* SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10, or U1 or faster)
XAVC S HD 60Mbps

XAVC S 4K 100Mbps*
SDHC/SDXC card (U3)
XAVC S HD 100Mbps

* Including when recording proxy movies at the same time

Note
When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size.

Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.

Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

69
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Notes on memory card

If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV devices that are
not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT
before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to
format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card. (exFAT
is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present

If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Format the memory card
using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of a memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot record or
delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

70
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Attaching/removing a lens

Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.

1 Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.

It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.

2 Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.

Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.

3 While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.

Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.

71
To remove the lens
Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.

Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.

Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.

Do not use force when attaching a lens.

A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.

When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.

When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.

Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

72
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Mount Adaptor

Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

Note
When a setting other than [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is selected for [Cont. Shooting], the focus is locked during the first shot,
even if [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility on compatible lenses.

You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.

Related Topic
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

73
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF

When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.

Available focus area:

[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center]/[Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking]
SteadyShot:
In-body

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

74
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Available
AF system:
Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the Mount Adaptor
AF/MF select:
Lenses that do not support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens.
Lenses that support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens. When
the focus mode switch on the lens is set to AF, you can change the focusing method by operating the camera.
Other lenses (without a focus mode switch): Can be changed by operating the camera.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/Automatic AF/DMF*
* Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.

Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to [AF].
Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to [Release].

Available focus area:

Wide/Center/Flexible Spot/Tracking
SteadyShot:
In-body

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

75
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods.
For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.

Note
While the plug-in plate of the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit is inserted in the camera, do not slide the battery lock lever of the camera.
The plug-in plate will be ejected from the camera if you do so.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

76
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Setting language, date and time

The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time,
initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged.

1 Turn on the camera.

The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will appear.

2 Select your language, and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press the center.

4 Select your desired geographic location, and then press the center.

5 Select a setting item using the top/bottom side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, then
press the center.

6 Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the top/bottom/left/right sides, then press the
center.

Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM when you set [Date/Time].
Change the values using the top/bottom when you set [Date/Time].

7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press the center.

On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of
whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product
for 24 hours or more with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.

Hint
To set the date and time or geographic location again after the date and time setting is finished, select MENU → (Setup) →
[Date/Time Setup] or [Area Setting].

Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.

77
Related Topic
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Using the control wheel

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

78
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

In-Camera Guide

The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.

1 Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).

The descriptions of the item are displayed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

79
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shooting still images

1 Select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.

2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold the camera.

3 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the zoom ring.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the focus indicator (such as ) lights up.

5 Press the shutter button fully down.

To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Single-shot AF] or [Automatic AF].

2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.

80
 The focus is locked.

If it is difficult to focus on the desired subject, set [Focus Area] to [Center] or [Flexible Spot].

3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original position to re-compose the
shot.

4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.

Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus setting. In [Continuous AF] mode, the (focus indicator) lights up and the beep indicating that the
focus has been achieved does not sound.

Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.

When the subject is moving, you cannot lock the focus even if [Focus Mode] has been set to [Automatic AF].

When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism.

When a lens from another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, the correct exposure may not be
achieved, or the image brightness may be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment.

Related Topic
List of mode dial function
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
Playing back still images
Auto Review
Focus Mode
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

81
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Mode

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances

Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.

82
 When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.

When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to (S&Q
Motion).

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
MF Assist (still image)
Phase detection AF

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

83
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot.

Examples of the focusing frame display

The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

84
 When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the (Delete) button while moving
the frame. To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is
assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On/Tracking On + AF On)

You can temporarily change the [Focus Mode] setting to [Continuous AF] and the [Focus Area] setting to [Tracking] for as
long as you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] in
advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] will switch to the
equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:

[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking [Focus Area] while [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On]/[Tracking On + AF On] On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]

[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

85
 This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].

Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the
[Focus Area].

You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the C button while moving the focusing frame.

Related Topic
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Touch Operation
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

86
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Area Limit

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.

Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or
[ Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas
with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area
Limit].

Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [ Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the
registered settings will change.

Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

87
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Phase detection AF

When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.

Note
Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.
Automatic AF
AF Tracking Sens.
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sens.

Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

88
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Standard

If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall useful functions such as moving the focusing
frame quickly, etc., depending on the focus area settings.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard]
function to the key.

To use the [Focus Standard] function while shooting movies, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key] → the desired button, and then assign [Focus Standard] to the key.

2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [Focus Area].

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible
Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]:
Pressing the key moves the position of the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center], [Tracking: Wide] or [Tracking: Center]:
The camera focuses on the center of the screen when you press the key.

Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

89
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the
camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus
Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note
If the setting for [ Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [ Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point
+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or [S&Q Motion]
While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

90
 When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

91
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF/MF control

You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired button → [AF/MF
Control Hold] or [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].

Menu item details

AF/MF Control Hold :
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Ctrl Toggle :
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.

Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

92
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you
focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

1. Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [AF On] and [Focus
Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
3. Set [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.
4. Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.
5. Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-
adjustments of the focus.
6. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

Related Topic
AF On
Eye-Start AF (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

93
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF On

You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [Focus Mode] will be applied.

1 MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] →desired key, then assign the
[AF On] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function while auto-focus shooting.

Hint
Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.

Set [ AF w/ shutter], [ Pre-AF], and [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the
position of the subject.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
Eye-Start AF (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

94
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.
The function to detect animal eyes when shooting movies can be used if the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.
2.00 or later.

There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.

[Eye AF] via a custom key

Item [Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.] Details can be found here.

The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater The camera will detect faces/eyes
Subject detection
priority. exclusively.

Advance Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
preparation AF] → [On]. Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

How to perform Press the key to which you have assigned

Press the shutter button halfway down.
[Eye AF] the [Eye AF] function*.

When the camera detects a face or eye inside

The camera focuses exclusively on
or around the designated focus area, it
faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,
focuses on the face or eye with greater
regardless of the setting for [Focus
priority.
Specifications Area].
If the camera does not detect any faces or
The camera will not automatically focus
eyes inside or around the designated focus
on another subject if no face or eye is
area, it will focus on another detectable
detected anywhere on the screen.
subject.

Follows the setting designated with [Focus

Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]
Mode]

The focus area temporarily becomes the

Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area] entire screen, regardless of the setting for
[Focus Area].

How the following

functions under
[Face/Eye AF Set.]
work
Subject
Detection Follows the setting designated with each menu Follows the setting designated with each
Right/Left Eye item menu item
Select
Face/Eye
Frame Display
Animal Eye
Display

95
* Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while
you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].

Hint
Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)
If you adjust the settings under [Face/Eye AF Set.] to focus on faces or eyes, the focusing frame will automatically move to a face
or eye when faces or eyes are detected while tracking subjects with the tracking function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])

Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.

Eye detection frame

96
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].

[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs
normal auto-focusing.)

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.
3. Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch
the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button

Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.

If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].

97
 Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Right/Left Eye Select
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Faces Priority

The [Eye AF] function may not function properly under certain conditions, such as in the following situations.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.

If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.

When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.

The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.

You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]
Focus Magnifier
Movie shooting with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [ 4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]

Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].

To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.

Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

98
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using
top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The camera will focus on the position of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[ AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[ Eye-Start AF]
[ Pre-AF]
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

99
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

100
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.

[Tracking On + AF On] is assigned to the AF-ON button when shooting still images in the default settings. The
camera tracks and keeps the focus on the subject while the AF-ON button is being pressed. Shoot images by
pressing the shutter button all the way in while holding down the AF-ON button.
For the examples of usage, etc. of tracking function, refer to the following URL.
For still image shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/still_tracking.php
For movie shooting:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/movie_tracking.php

You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Func. of Touch
Operation])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.

This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].

Changing the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On] under [ Custom Key])
Even when [Focus Area] is not set to [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking]
and the setting for [Focus Mode] to [Continuous AF]. Press and hold the key to which you have assigned the [Tracking
On]/[Tracking On + AF On] function.

Assign the [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key] in advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

101
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

102
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Hold

Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.

1 MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] →assign the [Focus Hold]
function to the key of your choice.

2 Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.

3 Press the shutter button while holding down the key.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

103
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.

How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [ AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.

Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Movie) or (S&Q Motion)
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or (S&Q Motion)

When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Dial / Wheel Lock] setting is locked to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

104
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [ AF Area Registration].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

105
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Frame Color

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.

Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

106
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[ Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

107
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.
Off:
Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint
[ Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor LA-EA4 (sold separately) are attached.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

108
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Tracking Sens.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3(Standard) / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.
Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

109
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Priority Set in AF-C

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

110
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the
subject is in motion.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Priority Set in AF-S

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

111
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
If the Multi Interface Shoe is equipped with a flash with an AF illuminator function, when the flash is turned on, the AF
illuminator will turn on as well.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator /
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

112
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

113
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

114
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Circ. of Focus Point

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with
[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the
other quickly.

1 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate :
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

115
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Frame Move Amt

Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], etc. You can quickly
move the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].

Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], the [AF Frame
Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.

If any of the following functions is assigned to the control dial or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the
focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

Note
When using the LA-EA4 mount adapter, the focusing frame will move by the distance designated with [Standard] even if [Large]
is selected.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

116
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses
with an LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper
position when using this adjustment.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].

2 Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

3 [amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the
value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.

Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a
bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears
for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a
new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses
using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the
supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an
unsupported lens.

You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

117
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].

Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

118
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Manual Focus

When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].

2 Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.

When you shoot a still image, you can display the focus distance on the screen by rotating the focusing ring.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.

The displayed focus distance is just a reference.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Setting
MF Assist (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

119
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Direct manual focus (DMF)

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [DMF].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.

3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

Related Topic
Peaking Setting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

120
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus
Mag.].

3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [ AF in
Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [ AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can
perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus
magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic
MF Assist (still image)

121
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

122
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].

Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[ MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

123
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

124
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.9:
Displays a 5.9-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x3.8:
Displays a 3.8-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

125
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Peaking Setting

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

126
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

127
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cont. Shooting

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].

You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi+ :
Images are shot continuously at the maximum speed while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous Shooting: Lo:
Subjects are easier to track because the subject is displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder during shooting.

Number of still images recordable with continuous shooting

The following table shows estimated numbers of recordable still images with [Drive Mode] set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi+]. The numbers may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.

[ JPEG Image Size]: [L:24M]

File Format/ JPEG Quality Number of images

JPEG Fine Approx. 223 images

JPEG Extra fine Approx. 215 images

RAW (Compressed RAW) Approx. 115 images

RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)* Approx. 86 images

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) Approx. 45 images

RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)* Approx. 39 images

* [ JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]

Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[ AEL w/ shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]

Note
The shooting speed during continuous shooting becomes slower when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Uncompressed].

When the F-value is greater than F11 in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi] or [Continuous Shooting: Mid]
mode, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.

128
 The subject is not displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder when shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.

Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

[Picture Effect] is set to one of the following: [Rich-tone Mono.]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].

The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.

Related Topic
Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)
Focus Mode
Aperture Drive in AF (still image)
AEL w/ shutter (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

129
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Sets whether to display an indicator of the remaining time for which continuous shooting can be performed at the same
shooting speed.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Cont. Shoot. Length] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Always Display:
Always displays the indicator when the drive mode is set to [Cont. Shooting].
Shoot.-Only Display:
Displays the indicator only while continuous shooting is performed.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the indicator.

Hint
When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will
decrease.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

130
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Self-timer

Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.

Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.

Self-timer: 10 Sec
Self-timer: 5 Sec
Self-timer: 2 Sec

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.

Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.

Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.

To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].

Related Topic
Audio signals

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

131
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Self-timer(Cont)

Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.

Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-timer.

Press / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

132
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cont. Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The base exposure is set at the first shot.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

133
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Single Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Press the shutter button for each image.

Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

134
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Indicator during bracket shooting

Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)

Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

Monitor (For viewfinder)

Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing (lower indicator)

3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."

Note
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.

When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.

135
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

136
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

WB bracket

Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
*MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

137
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

DRO Bracket

You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

138
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)

Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

139
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). On this camera, you cannot create a movie from still images shot using the interval shooting
function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.

3 Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Silent Shoot. in Interval:
Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])

Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.

140
 [AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.

Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

[Silent Shoot. in Interval] is set to [On] in the default settings, regardless of the setting for [ Silent Shooting].

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M

Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

141
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.

Related Topic
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Touch Pad Settings
Touch Panel/Pad

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

142
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Panel/Pad

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when
shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel
operations or touch pad operations.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with
the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

143
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter

When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.

1 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].

2 Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.

The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.

To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the icon again.

The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.

3 Touch the subject to focus on.

When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.

Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.

Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter

The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.

Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During viewfinder shooting
When the shooting mode is set to [Movie]
When the shooting mode is set to [S&Q Motion]
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the [ Clear Image Zoom]

Related Topic
Touch Operation

144
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

145
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

1. Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.

To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch the (Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control
wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.

2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.

1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the focus ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch the (Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

146
 Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

147
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].

2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

3 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch the (Tracking Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When shooting movies with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]

Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

148
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode
Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.

Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.

Hint
In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as
the entire screen.

149
Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

150
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[ Long Exposure NR]
[BULB]
[Cont. Shooting] when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]

You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed using [ RAW File Type].

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

Related Topic
JPEG Image Size (still image)
RAW File Type (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

151
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

RAW File Type (still image)

Selects the file type for RAW images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ RAW File Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].
Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the file size
of the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.

Hint
When [Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the icon on the screen switches to (RAW). (RAW) is also
displayed while an image shot in uncompressed RAW format is played back.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

152
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

JPEG Quality (still image)

Selects the JPEG image quality when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.

Related Topic
File Format (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

153
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

JPEG Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When recording in the full frame size

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels

M: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 21M 5328×4000 pixels

M: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

S: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels

M: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels

154
 Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

M: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

M: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

S: 2.6M 1968×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

M: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

S: 2.3M 1744×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

M: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

S: 2.2M 1968×1112 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

M: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

S: 1.7M 1312×1312 pixels

Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”

155
Related Topic
Aspect Ratio (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

156
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aspect Ratio (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

157
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

APS-C/Super 35mm

Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you
select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [APS-C/Super 35mm] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note
When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting
results.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

158
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Angle of view

The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [APS-
C/Super 35mm] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.

Angle of view equivalent to full frame

(A) When shooting still images (with [ Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2])
(B) When recording movies

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame in the following situations.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Auto], and a full frame shooting-compatible lens is attached.
[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Off].

Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm

(A) When shooting still images (with [ Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2])
(B) When recording movies

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to the APS-C size or Super 35mm in the following situations. The
angle of view becomes approx. 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Auto], and an APS-C-format dedicated lens is attached.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [On].

Note
When recording full-frame movies with [ File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] set to [30p 60M] or [30p
100M], the angle of view (B) is equivalent to approx. 1.2 times the focal length indicated on the lens.

159
 (A) Angle of view equivalent to full-frame
(B) Angle of view during XAVC S 4K movie recording set to [30p 60M]/[30p 100M]
(C) Angle of view equivalent to Super 35mm

Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
APS-C/Super 35mm

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

160
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

List of mode dial function

You can switch the shooting mode according to the subject or purpose of shooting.

1 Turn the mode dial to select the desired shooting mode.

Available functions
(Intelligent Auto):
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.
P (Program Auto):
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
Also you can select various settings using the menu.
A (Aperture Priority):
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
S (Shutter Priority):
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
M (Manual Exposure):
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)).
(Movie):
Allows you to change the exposure mode for movie recording.
(S&Q Motion):
Allows you to shoot slow-motion and quick-motion movies.
1/2/3 (Memory recall):
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.

Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Movie: Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

161
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

162
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Intelligent Auto

The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.

1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).

The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).

2 Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.

For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.

Related Topic
About Scene Recognition

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

163
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

About Scene Recognition

Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode.

This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and shoot the image.

Scene Recognition

When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed on the first line:

(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)

Related Topic
Intelligent Auto

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

164
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Program Auto

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].

1 Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).

2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the control dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.

“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the control dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.

Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.

Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.

When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

165
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aperture Priority

You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.

1 Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).

2 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
Aperture Preview

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

166
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shutter Priority

You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the
instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.

1 Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).

2 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.

When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.

When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be done after
shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in
progress.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
Long Exposure NR (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

167
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Manual Exposure

You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.

1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

2 Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control wheel.

Select the desired aperture value by turning the control dial.

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel using MENU → (Camera Settings2)
→ [Dial/Wheel Setup].
You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for
appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using a numerical value on the monitor and with a metering indicator on
the viewfinder.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value (Manual shift).
Assign [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] to a desired key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], and then turn the control dial or
control wheel while pressing that key.

Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

168
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bulb shooting

You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.

1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

2 Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.

3 Set the aperture value (F-value) by turning the control dial.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.

As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the
focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.

In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.

During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod or a Bluetooth remote commander (sold
separately). When using a Bluetooth remote commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the
remote commander. To stop bulb shooting, press the shutter button on the remote commander again.

Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.

When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter
was open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.

You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
[Auto HDR]
[Picture Effect] is set to [Rich-tone Mono.].
When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:

[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]

[ Silent Shooting]

If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.

Related Topic
169
Manual Exposure

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

170
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [ /
Memory] in advance.

1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Memory recall).

2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [
/ Recall].

Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3 (Memory recall), then select the desired number by
pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note
If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

171
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).

2 MENU→ (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

172
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback
speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [ S&Q Settings].

1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic
S&Q Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

173
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).

1 Turn the exposure compensation dial (A).

+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor

Viewfinder

174
To set the exposure compensation value using the MENU
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV when the exposure compensation
dial is set to “0.”
MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.

Hint
The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] or [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] in MENU.

Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.

When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the exposure compensation value switches to
“0” regardless of the [Exposure Comp.] setting.

Related Topic
Exposure step
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Setting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

175
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Reset EV Comp.

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when you turn off the power when the
exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Maintain:
Maintains the settings.
Reset:
Resets the settings.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

176
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

You can compensate the exposure using the control dial or the control wheel. You can adjust the exposure in a range of
-5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.

1 Set the exposure compensation dial to "0."

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.

Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally assigned can be managed
using the control wheel, and vice versa.

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] in MENU or the exposure settings using
the control dial or the control wheel.

When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] is disabled.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

177
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

178
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure step

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.3EV / 0.5EV
Note
Even if you set [Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using the exposure compensation dial changes in steps
of 0.3EV.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

179
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be
coordinated with the focus area.

When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point

180
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

181
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

182
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates
to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.

Related Topic
Focus Area
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

183
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AE lock

When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign
[AEL toggle] to the key.

2 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.

3 Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.

The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.

4 Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.

To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.

Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], you can lock the exposure as long as you are
holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

184
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus
Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the
subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], operation using the key will be given
priority over the [ AEL w/ shutter] settings.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

185
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of
exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

186
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic
Flash Comp.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

187
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zebra Setting

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.

Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

188
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).

Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

189
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

Note
This function is not available when the [ File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.

You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
(Auto HDR error) will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

190
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.

1 ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1 EV
steps by turning the control dial.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 204800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400,
the setting is automatically switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100,
the setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].

Note
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:
[Intelligent Auto]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

191
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and
select the desired values.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ISO Range Limit].

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].

Related Topic
ISO Setting: ISO

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

192
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]
is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/160
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
ISO Setting: ISO

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

193
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

The zoom features available with this product

The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.

When a power zoom lens is mounted:

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:

1. Optical zoom range

Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider is fixed at the left end of the zoom bar while
the zoom position is in the optical zoom range (displayed as ×1.0).

2. Smart Zoom range ( )

Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [ JPEG
Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).

3. Clear Image Zoom range ( )

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [ClearImage Zoom] or
[Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

4. Digital Zoom range ( )

You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this
zoom function.

Note
The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].

The default setting for the [ JPEG Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [ JPEG Image Size] to [M] or [S].

The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [ Frame Rate] set to [120fps]/[100fps]

You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

When a power zoom lens is mounted, you cannot use [Zoom] under MENU. If you enlarge image past the optical zoom range,
the product automatically switches to another [Zoom] function than the optical zoom.

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown
by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].

194
 When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Tracking function

To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign [Zoom] to the desired key using [ Custom Key].

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
Zoom Setting
About zoom scale
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

195
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].

2 When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge
subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically switches to another zoom than
the optical zoom.

3 When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom]
→ desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2)
→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

Related Topic
Zoom Setting
The zoom features available with this product
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

196
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [ JPEG Image Size] to
[M] or [S].
ClearImage Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

197
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

About zoom scale

The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.

When [ Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Full-frame
JPEG Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) ClearImage Zoom Digital Zoom

L: 24M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

M: 10M Approx. 1.5× Approx. 3× Approx. 6.1×

S: 6.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

APS-C
JPEG Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) ClearImage Zoom Digital Zoom

L: 10M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

M: 6.0M Approx. 1.3× Approx. 2.6× Approx. 5.2×

S: 2.6M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Setting
JPEG Image Size (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

198
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

199
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the control dial instead
of pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

(Ambience) or (White) is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

200
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic
White Balance

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

201
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1] to [Custom 3], and
then press the right side of the control wheel.

2 Select (custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.

4 Press the center of the control wheel.

The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.

Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When
an error value is set, the indicator (custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator
will be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.

If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

202
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to
[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [
Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].

Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [ Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],
and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to
[Flash].

Related Topic
White Balance
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

203
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:

204
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the desired
settings using the right button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

205
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

206
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Rich-tone Mono.]

In the case of [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, (Picture Effect error) will appear on the recorded image to
inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

207
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

208
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

209
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to
moments when flickering will have less of an impact.
This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the
lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.

The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
On:
Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway
down, (flicker icon) will be displayed.

Hint
The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we
recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even
when in the manual focus mode.

Note
When you set [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the image quality of the live view may be reduced.

When you set [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the
shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.

The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.

The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.

Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light
source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.

[ Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting
[ Silent Shooting]
Movie shooting mode

The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [ Anti-flicker Shoot.].

210
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

211
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

212
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

213
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Silent Shooting (still image)

You can shoot images without the shutter sound.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[ Silent Shooting] is deactivated.

Note
Use the [ Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait
rights of the subject.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

When shooting still images using the [ Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you point the camera at a very
bright light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in darker tones.

When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a malfunction.

Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur. The distortion may become more noticeable
when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Uncompressed]. To decrease the distortion, set [ File Format] to [JPEG]. If you want to
shoot images in the RAW format with less distortion, set [Drive Mode] to [Cont. Shooting] and [ RAW File Type] to
[Compressed].

If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.

If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates, set [Audio signals] to [Off].

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], you may hear the shutter sound under the following circumstances:
When you capture a standard white color for the custom white balance
When you register faces using [Face Registration]

You cannot select [ Silent Shooting] when the mode dial is set to other than P/A/S/M.

When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting

After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately 0.5 seconds.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

214
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod, etc.

Hint
If you intend to use the image stabilization function of the Movie Edit add-on smartphone application, set [SteadyShot] to [Off] on
the camera.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

215
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

2 [SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index and set the focal-length.

Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera
towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set
[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The currently set value for the
SteadyShot focal length will appear next to (camera shake icon).

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal
length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic
SteadyShot

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

216
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Lens Comp.

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

217
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or
longer.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

218
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
[ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

219
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Regist. Faces Priority

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.

Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]

Related Topic
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

220
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.

Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

221
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

2 Select a face to change the order of priority.

3 Select the destination.

Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

222
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

223
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using flash (sold separately)

In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.

For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.

2 Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.

(Flash charge icon) blinking: Charging is in progress

(Flash charge icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.

Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded.
Remove the lens hood.

When using the flash, stand 1 m or more away from the subject.

You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)

Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When
attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.

The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.

For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic

224
Flash Mode
Wireless Flash

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

225
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

226
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
Wireless Flash

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

227
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

228
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FEL lock

The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired button, then assign the [FEL Lock
toggle] function to the button.

2 Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.

3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.

A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.

4 Adjust the composition and shoot the image.

When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.

Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.
When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.

229
 Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.

If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.

When both AE and FEL lock are locked, (AE lock/FEL lock icon) lights up.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

230
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

External Flash Set.

You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.

3 Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.

Menu item details

Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.

Hint
If you assign the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] function to a key in advance by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key], you can call up the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] screen simply by pressing that key.

You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].

You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.

Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.

You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.

Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].

[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:

When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or during movie shooting

Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.

For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/7c/

231
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

232
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.

3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key], and then pressing that key.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

233
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shooting movies

You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 Press the MOVIE button to start recording.

2 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Hint
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom
Key] → set [Movie Shooting] to the preferred key.

When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].

To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focusing frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the
[Focus Area] to [Wide].

You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)

To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the shooting mode to (Movie) and select the
desired exposure mode.

The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie shooting:
White Balance
Creative Style
Metering Mode
Face/Eye Priority in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer
Lens Comp.

You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than
ISO 102400, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to
the original setting.

In movie shooting mode, ISO sensitivity can be selected from ISO 100 to ISO 102400. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller
than ISO 100, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the
original setting.

While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the shooting information display by setting [HDMI Info. Display]
to [Off].

234
 Note
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could be recorded, depending on the situation used.

To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded during movie recording when a power zoom lens is used,
we recommend recording movies using the zoom lever. When you move the zoom lever, place your finger lightly on the lever and
operate it without flicking.

An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.

The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

If (Overheating warning icon) appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera and
wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion) or when shooting movies, you cannot select [Tracking] for
[Focus Area].

In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the shutter speed will be set automatically and cannot be
changed. For that reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a bright environment, and the motion of the subject may not be
recorded smoothly. By changing the exposure mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the motion of the
subject can be recorded smoothly.

In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in [Picture Effect]. When a movie recording starts, [Off] will be set
temporarily.
Rich-tone Mono.

The Face Detection function / Eye Detection function is not available in the following situations.
[ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and [
4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting a movie at low ISO sensitivity, the highlighted area in
the image may be recorded as a black area.

If the display mode of the monitor is set to [For viewfinder], the display mode will switch to [Display All Info.] when movie shooting
starts.

Related Topic
Movie w/ shutter
File Format (movie)
Recordable movie times
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

235
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Movie w/ shutter

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the
MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [ REC Control].

Note
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic
Shooting movies

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

236
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Movie recording formats

The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.

What is XAVC S?
Records movies in high definition such as 4K by converting them into MP4 movies using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images with higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while
reducing the amount of data.

XAVC S recording format

XAVC S 4K:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, approx. 60 Mbps, approx. 50 Mbps, approx. 25 Mbps, or approx. 16 Mbps
Bit rate is the amount of data processed within a given period of time.

Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

237
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

XAVC S 4K:
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080).

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

238
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

24p 100M * Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

24p 60M * Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Record
Bit-rate Description
Setting

60p 50M/50p Approx. 50

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
50M Mbps

60p 25M/50p Approx. 25

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
25M Mbps

30p 50M/25p Approx. 50

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
50M Mbps

30p 16M/25p Approx. 16

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
16M Mbps

Approx. 50
24p 50M * Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.
120p 100M/100p Approx. 100
100M Mbps You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.

239
 Record
Bit-rate Description
Setting

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.
120p 60M/100p Approx. 60
60M Mbps You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Note
Recording frame rates are indicated as the closest integer values. The actual corresponding frame rates are as follows:
24p: 23.98 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 60p: 59.94 fps, and 120p: 119.88 fps.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]

In full-frame shooting, the angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]

Related Topic
APS-C/Super 35mm

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

240
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format. Sound will not be recorded.

1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).

2 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired setting of
slow-motion/quick-motion ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or
Manual Exposure).

3 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

241
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Record Setting
Frame Rate
25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].

Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [ Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].

Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[ TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[ 4K Output Select]

Related Topic
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Recordable movie times

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

242
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Set the shooting mode to the (Movie) mode.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.

2 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].

[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.

3 Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.

[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.

4 Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.

[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.

To exit [ USB Streaming], press the center of the control wheel. The camera will return to the movie
recording mode.

About USB cable connections

If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [ USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [ USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.

Hint
If you assign [ USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.

The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [ USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed
video. Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.

If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch

During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

243
Note
You cannot do the following while [ USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Ctrl w/ Smartphone

The following functions are disabled while [ USB Streaming] is running.

Power Save Start Time

When performing USB streaming with settings for the movie shooting mode recalled by setting the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3
(Memory recall), you cannot switch to other registered settings during streaming.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

244
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Proxy Recording

Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording movies. Since proxy movies are small
in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.

Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.

Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (Proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]

Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Movie recording formats
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Memory cards that can be used

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

245
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

246
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.

Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

247
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

248
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio
during HDMI output.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

249
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

250
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Picture Profile

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.

HDR movie recording

251
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4],
[ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

252
 Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))

253
 B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].

To reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].

Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.

If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].

When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.

If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.

S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.

Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

254
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Gamma Disp. Assist

Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].

2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.

Note
Movies with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect
depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma
setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].

[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.

Related Topic
Picture Profile

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

255
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[ Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

256
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

257
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Transition Speed (movie)

You can set the transition speed of the focus when the target of auto-focusing changes while shooting a movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

7 (Fast) / 6 / 5 / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.

Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

258
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)

You can set the sensitivity for shifting the focus to another subject when the original subject moves out of the focusing
area while shooting a movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Subj. Shift Sens.]→desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

259
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

Note
When the monitor is flipped to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit are not displayed.

How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

260
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format *1)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

261
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

TC/UB Disp. Switch

Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch]
function has been assigned.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key], or [ Custom Key] → assign
the [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.

2 Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] is assigned.

Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie recording time counter → time code
(TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.

Note
When the monitor is flipped while in a shooting mode, such as during self-portrait shooting, TC/UB information is not displayed. In
the playback mode, TC/UB information is displayed even when the monitor is flipped.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

262
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting
movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.

Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or when shooting movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)

Related Topic
Marker Settings (movie)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

263
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

264
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

4K Output Select (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.

1 Turn the mode dial to (movie).

2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p) *:
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.

When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [ Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [ Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function

Related Topic
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)

265
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

266
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

267
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back still images

Plays back the recorded images.

1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.

2 Select the image with the control wheel.

Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images
in the group, press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB].

If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Related Topic
Recover Image DB
Display as Group

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

268
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the (Enlarge Image) button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or
next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Note
You cannot enlarge movies.

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

269
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.

Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

270
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

271
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

272
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

273
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back movies

Plays back the recorded movies.

1 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.

2 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.

Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel

Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.

Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.

Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera.

Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

274
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

275
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

2 MENU → (Playback) → [Photo Capture].

3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

276
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.

Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

277
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want
to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.

Menu item details

Select Dial/Wheel:
Selects the dial or wheel to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method:
Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.

Note
A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].

When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will
only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back
every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial/Wheel].

When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],
or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.

Related Topic
Rating
Protecting images (Protect)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

278
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

279
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
Select a group and press the center of the control wheel to play back images in the group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.

Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [ Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen, the (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.

Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].

If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

280
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cont. PB for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].

2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
PB Speed for Interval

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

281
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

PB Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for Interval].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for Interval].

Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

282
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

283
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (Protect) mark is displayed on protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.

Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

284
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded still images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find
images.
Combining this function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.

3 Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.

4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

285
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of stars ( ) when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

2 Add a (check) mark to the level of (ranking) that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

286
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The (print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the check box. To
cancel the selection, press the center again and clear the check box.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.

Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images

The number of copies cannot be specified.

Some printers do not support the date print function.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

287
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Deleting a displayed image

You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be
deleted beforehand.

1 Display the image you want to delete.

2 Press the (Delete) button.

3 Select [Delete] using the control wheel.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

Related Topic
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

288
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

Related Topic
Display as Group
Deleting a displayed image
Format

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

289
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

290
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an HD TV equipped with an
HDMI jack are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.

1 Turn off both this product and the TV.

2 Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately).

Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.

4 Turn on this product.

Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.

5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.

“BRAVIA” Sync
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate
this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.

1. After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] →
[CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
2. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.
If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

291
 Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to
another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL
FOR HDMI] → [Off].

Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices using an HDMI
cable (sold separately) or a USB cable, the TV is set to the image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a whole new world
of photos can be enjoyed in breathtaking high quality.

Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.

Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.

When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].

If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] →
[2160p/1080p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.

During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.

When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On], images cannot be output to an HDMI device while recording a 4K movie.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

292
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Customization features of the camera

The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.

To assign frequently used functions to buttons ( Custom Key/ Custom Key/ Custom
Key)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the custom button according to your preferences.
It is recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the
assigned functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.

To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)

If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered
functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the
function you want to use by selecting the icons.

To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)

If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting, playback, and network menu on the “My
Menu” screen, you can quickly access the desired menu items.

293
To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial ( My Dial Settings )
You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings to the camera as “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.

Example: My dial setting screen for models with a front/rear dial

To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( / Memory)

You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings
easily by using the mode dial, etc.
* You cannot register custom key settings.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Add Item
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

294
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

Related Topic
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

295
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and
temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and
release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number from [Recall
Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.

2 Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you
want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

A (check) mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.

3 Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and
press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.

Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you
chose.

4 Select [Register].

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Exposure
Focus setting
Drive mode (other than self-timer)

To recall registered settings

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → Select the desired key and then select one of the
registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
2. On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.
Hint
You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using
[ Custom Key].

Note
The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is
set to P/A/S/M.

296
 Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered
settings may not take effect.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

297
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the control dial and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use
to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the control dial/control wheel.

In the following example, the functions listed in the table below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is
assigned to the C (Custom) button.

298
 Operating parts My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO Tv Creative Style

Control dial Av White Balance Picture Effect

1. Press the C (Custom) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.

The icons for the function registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control dial to set the aperture value.
3. Press the C button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.
4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control dial to set [White Balance].
5. Press the C button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Dial / Wheel Lock] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

299
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial/Wheel Setup

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed using the control dial.

Note
[Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

300
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

301
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial / Wheel Lock

You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Note
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], [Dial / Wheel Lock] is fixed to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

302
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with
compatible lenses).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame Select:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic
APS-C/Super 35mm

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

303
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Add Item].

2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Hint
You can add up to 30 items to (My Menu).

Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)

Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

304
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Sort Item].

2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

305
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Item].

2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.

Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

306
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].

2 Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.

Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

307
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

2 Select [OK].

Related Topic
Add Item
Delete Page

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

308
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

309
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.

Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

310
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aperture Preview

While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Aperture Preview] function to the
desired key.

2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was assigned.

Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Shot. Result Preview

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

311
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shot. Result Preview

While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Shot. Result Preview] function to the
desired key.

2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was assigned.

Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Aperture Preview

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

312
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to apply the effects of settings such as exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], and
[Picture Effect] to images on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.

Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Movie]
[S&Q Motion]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

313
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

314
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.

Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to
the preferred key.

If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or
[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check
mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.

Note
When the monitor is flipped out and rotated to the high-angle position, low-angle position, or self-portrait position, the eye sensor
of the camera will not detect your eye approaching even if [FINDER/MONITOR] is set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be
displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

315
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

316
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Viewfinder Bright.

When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], [Viewfinder Bright.] cannot be set to [Auto]. [Viewfinder Bright.] can only be set to
[Manual].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

317
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

318
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.
This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [ Custom Key].

Menu item details

Standard:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
High:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

Even when [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the
temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.

[ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:

During playback
During HDMI connection
When the temperature inside the camera's body is high

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

319
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display Quality

You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

320
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bright Monitoring

Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → assign the [Bright Monitoring] function to the
desired key.

2 Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an image.

The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.

Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.

[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [ MF Assist] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.

During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the
measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.

Related Topic
Live View Display

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

321
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

322
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10000405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2020)

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

323
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Settings (movie)

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].

Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

324
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

325
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [ File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can
select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [ File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

326
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[New Folder].

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

327
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].

Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

328
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

329
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Power Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

During [ USB Streaming]
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
During FTP transfer
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

330
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.

Related Topic
Recordable movie times

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

331
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

Note
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

332
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

333
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)

You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]
or [24p 100M].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].

2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.

Related Topic
Record Setting (movie)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

334
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.

Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.

Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

335
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.

Note
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

336
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
(STBY) The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
(REC) The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.

Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].

When you use the [ REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).

When [ TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.

Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

337
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

338
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB Connection

Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
Also, when you set MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct Method] to [USB], set [PC
Remote] under [PC Remote Function] to [Off].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.

Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

339
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

340
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use the
supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images Available

Playing back images Available

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections Available

Charging a battery pack Unavailable

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

341
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

342
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

343
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

344
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can
enter up to 46 letters.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

345
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].

Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged
battery pack.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

346
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

IPTC Information

You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata
Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.
* IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:
Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], the (IPTC) icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Register IPTC Info :

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera.

Hint
When you play back images that have IPTC information, the (IPTC) icon appears on the screen.

For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/

Note
Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.

You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.

To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.

Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.

Related Topic
Setting Reset

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

347
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Write Serial Number

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

348
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Related Topic
AF Micro Adj.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

349
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Imaging Edge Mobile

Using the smartphone application Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone. Download and install the application
Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

350
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Always Connected:
Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to
a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a
smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.

Note
If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].

Related Topic
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

351
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

You can connect this product to an NFC-enabled smartphone by touching them together and then operate the product
using the smartphone.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

On an iPhone, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Connect with the camera through One-touch
(NFC)] under [Connect with a new camera].

2 Switch this product to shooting mode.

The NFC function is available only when the (N-Mark) is displayed on the screen.

3 Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.

The smartphone and the camera are connected.

You can shoot an image via remote control while checking the composition of the image on the Imaging Edge
Mobile screen.

About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones
or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

Note
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the (N-Mark) of this
product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

352
 this, the location information link function is not available.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in playback mode, the displayed image is sent to the
smartphone.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Airplane Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

353
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and select [Connect with a new camera].

3 Scan the QR Code displayed on the camera while the [Connect using the camera QR Code] screen is
displayed on the smartphone.

Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the smartphone
screen.

4 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.

Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the smartphone. This
enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/
Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.

If you cannot connect your smartphone to this product using the [One-touch(NFC)] function or QR Code, use the SSID and
password.

354
Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

355
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the SSID and
password.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

3 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and select [Connect with a new camera] → [Connect
using the camera SSID/password].

4 Input the password that is displayed on this product.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

356
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

You can connect an iPhone or iPad to the camera using the QR Code and operate the camera using the iPhone or iPad.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your iPhone or iPad and select [Connect with a new camera].

3 Scan the QR Code displayed on the camera while the [Connect using the camera QR Code] screen is
displayed on the iPhone or iPad.

Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the screen of the
iPhone or iPad.

4 Select [OK] on the screen of the iPhone or iPad.

The iPhone or iPad will connect to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.

Hint
Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the iPhone or iPad. This
enables you to easily connect the iPhone or iPad to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/
Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.

If you cannot connect your iPhone or iPad to this product using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.

Related Topic

357
Imaging Edge Mobile
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

358
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

You can control the camera using an iPhone or iPad by connecting the iPhone or iPad to the camera using the SSID and
password.
Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

3 Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your iPhone or iPad, and select [Connect with a new camera] → [Connect
using the camera SSID/password].

4 Input the password that is displayed on this product.

The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do
this, the location information link function is not available.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

359
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images, movies, slow-motion movies, or quick-motion movies to a smartphone and view them. The
application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to
Smartphone] will appear.

2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the
smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.

360
 Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you
want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

While you transfer many images or long movies, we recommend that you supply power to the camera from a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Airplane Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

361
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

When transferring video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-bit-rate
proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Proxy Only:
Transfers only proxy movies.
Original Only:
Transfers only original movies.
Proxy & Original:
Transfers both proxy and original movies.

Note
While you transfer many images or long movies, we recommend that you supply power to the camera from a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Proxy Recording

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

362
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [Cnct.
during Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → desired setting.

Menu Item Details

On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [Cnct. during Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Advance Preparation

1. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.
2. MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → [On].
3. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.
4. Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote
Power ON/OFF] screen.

Operations

1. Turn off the camera.

2. Select the camera on the [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] screen of Imaging Edge Mobile to turn on the camera.
The camera’s access lamp will light up, and the browsing and transferring functions will become available.

Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera
Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera switches to the shooting mode, and [Send to Smartphone Func.] ends.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings

363
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

364
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)

With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled smartphone, and send an image displayed on
the product screen directly to the smartphone. You can transfer still images, movies and slow-motion and quick-motion
movies.

1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

On an iPhone, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Connect with the camera through One-touch
(NFC)] under [Connect with a new camera].

2 Display a single image on the product.

3 Touch the (N-Mark) on the camera to the smartphone for 1-2 seconds.

The product and the smartphone are connected, and then the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.

Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen functions of the smartphone.
The NFC function is available only when the (N-Mark) is displayed on the product.
To transfer two or more images, select MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to
Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen appears, use NFC to connect the product
and the smartphone.

About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones
or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

Note
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For an Android smartphone
Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone or iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile from Settings, and change the image size using [Copy Image Size].

365
 RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.

If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images using the NFC function.

If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the (N-Mark) of this
product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Airplane Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

366
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Location Info. Link Set.

You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.

Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.

1. Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.

2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.

2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].

3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].

4. : Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.

5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.

6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.

7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

367
 Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.

8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.

Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.

When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Imaging Edge Mobile.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge
Mobile.

To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].

The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

368
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/iem/

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

369
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the
instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.

1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.

2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.

3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.

You cannot use the following functions while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Linking location information with a smartphone
Power-save function

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

370
 Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

371
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP
servers is required.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.

Related Topic
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

372
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

373
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.

1 MENU → (Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

374
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without the (lock) mark do not require a password.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].

375
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

376
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz]. The [Frequency Band] setting only applies to [Send to Smartphone], [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and
[PC Remote] (Wi-Fi Direct).

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Frequency Band] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

Note
If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

377
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed under the following conditions.
[FTP Function] under [FTP Transfer Func.] is set to [On], and a Wi-Fi connection has been established.
[PC Remote] is set to [On] and [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point] under [PC Remote Function], and a
Wi-Fi connection has been established.

To display the QR Code for the MAC address

You can import the MAC address of this camera to a smartphone. Use one of the following methods to display the QR Code on
the screen, and read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on smartphone application.
When the camera is turned off, turn the camera on while pressing the (Playback) button.
Press the (Delete) button on the [Display Wi-Fi Info.] screen.

For details on how to read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on, refer to the following support page.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/transfer/l/macaddress/index.php
The Transfer & Tagging add-on is only available in certain countries and regions.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

378
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone], [ Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and
the Wi-Fi Direct connections using [PC Remote Function] with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to
change which devices have permission to connect, reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

379
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”

1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.

Related Topic
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

380
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Edit Device Name].

2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

381
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications
during FTP transfer.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [Import Root Certificate].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

382
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Security(IPsec)

Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a Wi-Fi connection.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.

Menu item details

IPsec ([On]/[Off]):
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].

For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.

On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.

Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.

For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

383
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

384
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recommended computer environment

You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

385
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Connecting to a computer

1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

2 Turn on the camera and the computer.

3 Check that [USB Connection] under (Setup) is set to [Mass Storage].

4 Connect the camera to the computer using the USB cable (supplied).

Connect the USB cable to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.
When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the product to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.
Use a USB 3.2-compatible computer and the USB Type-C cable (supplied) for higher-speed communications.

Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Related Topic
Side view
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

386
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Perform steps 1 and 2 below before performing the following operations:

Disconnecting the USB cable.

Removing a memory card.
Turning off the product.

1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.

2 Click the displayed message.

Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.

On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.

Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

387
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop)

Imaging Edge Desktop is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and
adjusting or developing RAW images recorded with the camera.

For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

388
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Importing images to the computer

You can download images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable,
or by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.

Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection

DCIM: still images

CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies

Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.

If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become
inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.

The folder tree is different during MTP connection.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

389
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/pcremote.php

1 MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.

2 Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct
Method].

Menu item details

PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
PC Remote Cnct Method:
Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]. ([USB]/[Wi-Fi
Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])
Pairing:
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to
[Wi-Fi Direct].
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC
Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])
RAW+J PC Save Img:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
PC Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The
original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])

How to connect the camera and the computer

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]
Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]

Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information
(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information
displayed on the camera.
390
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]
Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be
paired in advance.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the
wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.
Select MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge
Desktop (Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the
camera to finish pairing.

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be
released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

391
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Set the shooting mode to the (Movie) mode.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.

2 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].

[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.

3 Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.

[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.

4 Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.

[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.

To exit [ USB Streaming], press the center of the control wheel. The camera will return to the movie
recording mode.

About USB cable connections

If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [ USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [ USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.

Hint
If you assign [ USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.

The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [ USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed
video. Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.

If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch

During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

392
Note
You cannot do the following while [ USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Ctrl w/ Smartphone

The following functions are disabled while [ USB Streaming] is running.

Power Save Start Time

When performing USB streaming with settings for the movie shooting mode recalled by setting the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3
(Memory recall), you cannot switch to other registered settings during streaming.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

393
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You
can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.

2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to
another MENU tab.
You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.

3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center of the control wheel to confirm your selection.

Hint
You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom
Key], and then pressing that key.

Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu

394
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

395
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG:
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG
for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG:
The image is recorded in the JPEG format.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[ Long Exposure NR]
[BULB]
[Cont. Shooting] when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]

You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed using [ RAW File Type].

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

Related Topic
JPEG Image Size (still image)
RAW File Type (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

396
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

RAW File Type (still image)

Selects the file type for RAW images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ RAW File Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].
Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the file size
of the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.

Hint
When [Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the icon on the screen switches to (RAW). (RAW) is also
displayed while an image shot in uncompressed RAW format is played back.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

397
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

JPEG Quality (still image)

Selects the JPEG image quality when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.
This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.

Related Topic
File Format (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

398
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

JPEG Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When recording in the full frame size

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels

M: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 21M 5328×4000 pixels

M: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

S: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels

M: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels

399
 Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

M: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

M: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

S: 2.6M 1968×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

M: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

S: 2.3M 1744×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

M: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

S: 2.2M 1968×1112 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

Parameter Number of pixels (horizontal × vertical)

L: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

M: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

S: 1.7M 1312×1312 pixels

Note
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”

400
Related Topic
Aspect Ratio (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

401
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aspect Ratio (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

402
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

APS-C/Super 35mm

Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you
select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [APS-C/Super 35mm] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note
When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting
results.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

403
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or
longer.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

404
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
[ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

405
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

406
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Lens Comp.

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

407
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Single Shooting :
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting :
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont) :
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket :
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket :
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket :
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

408
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)

Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

409
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). On this camera, you cannot create a movie from still images shot using the interval shooting
function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the
desired setting.

3 Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Silent Shoot. in Interval:
Sets whether or not to perform silent shooting during interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])

Hint
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval
Shooting] → [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.

410
 [AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Control Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.

Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

[Silent Shoot. in Interval] is set to [On] in the default settings, regardless of the setting for [ Silent Shooting].

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M

Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

411
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [ /
Memory] in advance.

1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Memory recall).

2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [
/ Recall].

Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3 (Memory recall), then select the desired number by
pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note
If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

412
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

Related Topic
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

413
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and
temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and
release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number from [Recall
Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.

2 Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you
want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

A (check) mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.

3 Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and
press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.

Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you
chose.

4 Select [Register].

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Exposure
Focus setting
Drive mode (other than self-timer)

To recall registered settings

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → Select the desired key and then select one of the
registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
2. On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.
Hint
You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using
[ Custom Key].

Note
The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is
set to P/A/S/M.

414
 Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered
settings may not take effect.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

415
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Mode

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF
from the second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
(DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances

Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.

416
 When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a
sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.

When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to (S&Q
Motion).

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
MF Assist (still image)
Phase detection AF

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

417
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Priority Set in AF-C

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

418
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the
subject is in motion.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Priority Set in AF-S

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

419
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority
area for focusing.
Tracking:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus
area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the
[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control
wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or
expand flexible spot.

Examples of the focusing frame display

The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

420
 When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the button to which [Focus
Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focusing frame using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel. To return the focusing frame to the center of the monitor, press the (Delete) button while moving
the frame. To change the shooting settings using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is
assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],
and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On/Tracking On + AF On)

You can temporarily change the [Focus Mode] setting to [Continuous AF] and the [Focus Area] setting to [Tracking] for as
long as you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] in
advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] or [Tracking On + AF On] will switch to the
equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:

[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking [Focus Area] while [Tracking On]/[Tracking On + AF
On]/[Tracking On + AF On] On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]

[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

421
 This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].

Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the
[Focus Area].

You cannot execute functions assigned to the control wheel or the C button while moving the focusing frame.

Related Topic
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Touch Operation
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

422
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Area Limit

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you
want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.

Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or
[ Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas
with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area
Limit].

Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [ Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the
registered settings will change.

Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

423
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the
camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus
Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note
If the setting for [ Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [ Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point
+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or [S&Q Motion]
While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

424
 When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

425
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
If the Multi Interface Shoe is equipped with a flash with an AF illuminator function, when the flash is turned on, the AF
illuminator will turn on as well.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator /
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

426
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.
The function to detect animal eyes when shooting movies can be used if the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.
2.00 or later.

There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.

[Eye AF] via a custom key

Item [Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.] Details can be found here.

The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater The camera will detect faces/eyes
Subject detection
priority. exclusively.

Advance Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
preparation AF] → [On]. Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

How to perform Press the key to which you have assigned

Press the shutter button halfway down.
[Eye AF] the [Eye AF] function*.

When the camera detects a face or eye inside

The camera focuses exclusively on
or around the designated focus area, it
faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,
focuses on the face or eye with greater
regardless of the setting for [Focus
priority.
Specifications Area].
If the camera does not detect any faces or
The camera will not automatically focus
eyes inside or around the designated focus
on another subject if no face or eye is
area, it will focus on another detectable
detected anywhere on the screen.
subject.

Follows the setting designated with [Focus

Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]
Mode]

The focus area temporarily becomes the

Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area] entire screen, regardless of the setting for
[Focus Area].

How the following

functions under
[Face/Eye AF Set.]
work
Subject
Detection Follows the setting designated with each menu Follows the setting designated with each
Right/Left Eye item menu item
Select
Face/Eye
Frame Display
Animal Eye
Display

427
* Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while
you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].

Hint
Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)
If you adjust the settings under [Face/Eye AF Set.] to focus on faces or eyes, the focusing frame will automatically move to a face
or eye when faces or eyes are detected while tracking subjects with the tracking function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :
Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection :
Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
Right/Left Eye Select :
Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only
the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display :
Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display :
Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])

Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is
enabled, the face detection frame turns white. Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects
the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.

Eye detection frame

428
A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,
depending on the settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].

[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as
you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or
eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs
normal auto-focusing.)

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye
AF] function to the key.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.
3. Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch
the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom
key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button

Hint
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection
frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.

If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].

429
 Note
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Right/Left Eye Select
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Faces Priority

The [Eye AF] function may not function properly under certain conditions, such as in the following situations.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much.

If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.

When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.

The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.

You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]
Focus Magnifier
Movie shooting with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],
and [ 4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]

Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or
eyes that are in focus.

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].

To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.

Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.

Related Topic
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF Area Auto Clear
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

430
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Tracking Sens.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3(Standard) / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.
Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

431
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].

Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

432
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you
focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

1. Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [AF On] and [Focus
Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
3. Set [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.
4. Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.
5. Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-
adjustments of the focus.
6. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

Related Topic
AF On
Eye-Start AF (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

433
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,
the screen may shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[ Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

434
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.
Off:
Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint
[ Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor LA-EA4 (sold separately) are attached.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

435
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.

How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [ AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.

Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Movie) or (S&Q Motion)
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or (S&Q Motion)

When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Dial / Wheel Lock] setting is locked to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Focus Area
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

436
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [ AF Area Registration].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

437
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Frame Color

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.

Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

438
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is
achieved.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

439
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in
[Continuous AF] mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

440
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Circ. of Focus Point

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with
[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the
other quickly.

1 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate :
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

441
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Frame Move Amt

Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], etc. You can quickly
move the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].

Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], the [AF Frame
Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.

If any of the following functions is assigned to the control dial or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the
focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

Note
When using the LA-EA4 mount adapter, the focusing frame will move by the distance designated with [Standard] even if [Large]
is selected.

Related Topic
Focus Area

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

442
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses
with an LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper
position when using this adjustment.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].

2 Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

3 [amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the
value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.

Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a
bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears
for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a
new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses
using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the
supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an
unsupported lens.

You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

443
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).

1 Turn the exposure compensation dial (A).

+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor

Viewfinder

444
To set the exposure compensation value using the MENU
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV when the exposure compensation
dial is set to “0.”
MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.

Hint
The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] or [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] in MENU.

Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.

When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the exposure compensation value switches to
“0” regardless of the [Exposure Comp.] setting.

Related Topic
Exposure step
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Setting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

445
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Reset EV Comp.

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when you turn off the power when the
exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Maintain:
Maintains the settings.
Reset:
Resets the settings.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

446
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.

1 ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1 EV
steps by turning the control dial.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 204800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400,
the setting is automatically switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100,
the setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].

Note
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:
[Intelligent Auto]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

447
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and
select the desired values.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ISO Range Limit].

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [Picture Profile].

Related Topic
ISO Setting: ISO

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

448
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]
is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/160
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
ISO Setting: ISO

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

449
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be
coordinated with the focus area.

When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected
faces.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and
the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.
Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point

450
Face Priority in Multi Metering
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

451
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in
Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

452
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates
to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.

Related Topic
Focus Area
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

453
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure step

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.3EV / 0.5EV
Note
Even if you set [Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using the exposure compensation dial changes in steps
of 0.3EV.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

454
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus
Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the
subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], operation using the key will be given
priority over the [ AEL w/ shutter] settings.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

455
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of
exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic
Metering Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

456
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
Wireless Flash

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

457
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

458
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic
Flash Comp.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

459
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.

3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key], and then pressing that key.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

460
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

461
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

External Flash Set.

You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.

3 Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.

Menu item details

Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.

Hint
If you assign the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] function to a key in advance by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [
Custom Key], you can call up the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] screen simply by pressing that key.

You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].

You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.

Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.

You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.

Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].

[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:

When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or during movie shooting

Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.

For details on flashes and Wireless Radio Commanders that are compatible with this function, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/dics/7c/

462
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

463
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /
Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the control dial instead
of pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

(Ambience) or (White) is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB
WB bracket

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

464
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]
is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic
White Balance

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

465
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5
(strong).

Note
In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

466
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an
underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation
(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to
6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:
-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

Note
This function is not available when the [ File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.

You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.
(Auto HDR error) will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

467
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image
style.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left
sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:

468
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also
stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the desired
settings using the right button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and
[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

469
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

470
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you
cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Rich-tone Mono.]

In the case of [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to
obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, (Picture Effect error) will appear on the recorded image to
inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

471
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

472
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Picture Profile

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP10] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma.
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.

HDR movie recording

473
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after
shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
[Knee] is disabled if [Mode] is set to [Auto] when [Gamma] is set to [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4],
[ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3], [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]. To enable [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

474
 Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set
to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))

475
 B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].

To reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].

Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the shooting mode.

If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].

When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise
still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform
custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2],
or [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.

If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.

S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not
support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.

Related Topic
Gamma Disp. Assist

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

476
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to
[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [
Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].

Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [ Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],
and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to
[Flash].

Related Topic
White Balance
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

477
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge using
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus
Mag.].

3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [ AF in
Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [ AF in Focus Mag.] setting.

When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Focus Magnif. Time].

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can
perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus
magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic
MF Assist (still image)

478
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

479
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

480
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.9:
Displays a 5.9-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x3.8:
Displays a 3.8-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

481
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using
top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The camera will focus on the position of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[ AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[ Eye-Start AF]
[ Pre-AF]
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

482
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

483
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.
Time].

Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[ MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

484
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Peaking Setting

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking.
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

485
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to
moments when flickering will have less of an impact.
This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the
lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.

The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
On:
Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway
down, (flicker icon) will be displayed.

Hint
The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we
recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even
when in the manual focus mode.

Note
When you set [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the image quality of the live view may be reduced.

When you set [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the
shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.

The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.

The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.

Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light
source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.

[ Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting
[ Silent Shooting]
Movie shooting mode

The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [ Anti-flicker Shoot.].

486
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

487
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,
sunglasses, etc.

Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

488
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the
priority order.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

2 Select a face to change the order of priority.

3 Select the destination.

Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

489
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

490
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Regist. Faces Priority

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.

Hint
To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]
[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]

Related Topic
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

491
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).

2 MENU→ (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

492
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback
speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [ S&Q Settings].

1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic
S&Q Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

493
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

XAVC S 4K:
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080).

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

494
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

24p 100M * Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

24p 60M * Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Record
Bit-rate Description
Setting

60p 50M/50p Approx. 50

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
50M Mbps

60p 25M/50p Approx. 25

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
25M Mbps

30p 50M/25p Approx. 50

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
50M Mbps

30p 16M/25p Approx. 16

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
16M Mbps

Approx. 50
24p 50M * Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.
120p 100M/100p Approx. 100
100M Mbps You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.

495
 Record
Bit-rate Description
Setting

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.
120p 60M/100p Approx. 60
60M Mbps You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing
devices.

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Note
Recording frame rates are indicated as the closest integer values. The actual corresponding frame rates are as follows:
24p: 23.98 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 60p: 59.94 fps, and 120p: 119.88 fps.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]

In full-frame shooting, the angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]

Related Topic
APS-C/Super 35mm

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

496
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format. Sound will not be recorded.

1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).

2 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired setting of
slow-motion/quick-motion ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or
Manual Exposure).

3 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [
Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Frame Rate Record Setting: 24p Record Setting: 30p Record Setting: 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

497
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Record Setting
Frame Rate
25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].

Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [ Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].

Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[ TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[ 4K Output Select]

Related Topic
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Recordable movie times

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

498
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Proxy Recording

Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording movies. Since proxy movies are small
in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On :
Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off :
Proxy movies are not recorded.

Hint
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as
that of the original movie.

Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (Proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]

Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Movie recording formats
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Memory cards that can be used

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

499
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Transition Speed (movie)

You can set the transition speed of the focus when the target of auto-focusing changes while shooting a movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

7 (Fast) / 6 / 5 / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.

Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

500
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

AF Subj. Shift Sens. (movie)

You can set the sensitivity for shifting the focus to another subject when the original subject moves out of the focusing
area while shooting a movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Subj. Shift Sens.]→desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3 / 2 / 1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

501
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[ Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

502
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

503
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

504
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the (microphone) terminal input.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

505
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.

Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

506
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio
during HDMI output.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

507
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

508
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting
movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.

Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie) or (S&Q Motion), or when shooting movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)

Related Topic
Marker Settings (movie)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

509
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

510
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

511
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Movie w/ shutter

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the
MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [ REC Control].

Note
When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic
Shooting movies

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

512
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Livestreaming video and audio (USB Streaming) (movie)

You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Set the shooting mode to the (Movie) mode.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.2.00 or later.

1 Set the camera to a movie recording mode and set the exposure, focus, etc.

2 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ USB Streaming].

[USB Streaming: Not Connect] will appear on the camera screen.

3 Follow the instructions on the screen to connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB
cable.

[USB Streaming: Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby
state.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.

4 Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.

[USB Streaming: Output] will appear on the camera screen.

To exit [ USB Streaming], press the center of the control wheel. The camera will return to the movie
recording mode.

About USB cable connections

If the power of the camera is turned on while the USB cable is connected, [ USB Streaming] cannot be executed.
Unplug the USB cable, execute [ USB Streaming], and then reconnect the USB cable.

Hint
If you assign [ USB Streaming] to a custom key, you can launch [ USB Streaming] just by pressing the key.

The movie recording settings (focus, exposure, etc.) before executing [ USB Streaming] are applied to the livestreamed
video. Adjust the movie recording settings before you start streaming.

If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during USB streaming.

The format of the streaming data is as follows.

Video format: MJPEG
Resolution: HD720 (1280×720)
Frame rate: 30 fps / 25 fps
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch

During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].

When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.

513
Note
You cannot do the following while [ USB Streaming] is running.
Recording the streaming video
Menu-screen operations
Transition to the playback screen
Capturing a custom white balance
PC Remote Function
Ctrl w/ Smartphone

The following functions are disabled while [ USB Streaming] is running.

Power Save Start Time

When performing USB streaming with settings for the movie shooting mode recalled by setting the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3
(Memory recall), you cannot switch to other registered settings during streaming.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

514
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Silent Shooting (still image)

You can shoot images without the shutter sound.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[ Silent Shooting] is deactivated.

Note
Use the [ Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait
rights of the subject.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

When shooting still images using the [ Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you point the camera at a very
bright light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in darker tones.

When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a malfunction.

Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur. The distortion may become more noticeable
when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Uncompressed]. To decrease the distortion, set [ File Format] to [JPEG]. If you want to
shoot images in the RAW format with less distortion, set [Drive Mode] to [Cont. Shooting] and [ RAW File Type] to
[Compressed].

If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.

If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates, set [Audio signals] to [Off].

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], you may hear the shutter sound under the following circumstances:
When you capture a standard white color for the custom white balance
When you register faces using [Face Registration]

You cannot select [ Silent Shooting] when the mode dial is set to other than P/A/S/M.

When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting

After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately 0.5 seconds.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

515
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

516
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

517
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod, etc.

Hint
If you intend to use the image stabilization function of the Movie Edit add-on smartphone application, set [SteadyShot] to [Off] on
the camera.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

518
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

2 [SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index and set the focal-length.

Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera
towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set
[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The currently set value for the
SteadyShot focal length will appear next to (camera shake icon).

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal
length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic
SteadyShot

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

519
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].

2 When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge
subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically switches to another zoom than
the optical zoom.

3 When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom]
→ desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2)
→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

Related Topic
Zoom Setting
The zoom features available with this product
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

520
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [ JPEG Image Size] to
[M] or [S].
ClearImage Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

521
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

522
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with (check mark) are available.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.

For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.

Monitor Off*:
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

523
Related Topic
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

524
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.

Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.
MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to
the preferred key.

If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or
[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check
mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.

Note
When the monitor is flipped out and rotated to the high-angle position, low-angle position, or self-portrait position, the eye sensor
of the camera will not detect your eye approaching even if [FINDER/MONITOR] is set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be
displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

525
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.
This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [ Custom Key].

Menu item details

Standard:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
High:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

Even when [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the
temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.

[ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:

During playback
During HDMI connection
When the temperature inside the camera's body is high

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

526
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Zebra Setting

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.

Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively
in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

527
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

528
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

529
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to apply the effects of settings such as exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], and
[Picture Effect] to images on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This
setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].
When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.

Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Movie]
[S&Q Motion]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

530
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Sets whether to display an indicator of the remaining time for which continuous shooting can be performed at the same
shooting speed.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Cont. Shoot. Length] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Always Display:
Always displays the indicator when the drive mode is set to [Cont. Shooting].
Shoot.-Only Display:
Displays the indicator only while continuous shooting is performed.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the indicator.

Hint
When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will
decrease.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

531
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.

Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

532
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets
you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign
[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode ( Custom Key), movie
shooting mode ( Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).

Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.

You can assign functions to the following keys.

1. MOVIE Button
2. AF-ON Button
3. Fn/ Button
4. Center Button /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button
5. C Button

For details on setting custom keys, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/custom.php

Hint
You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the C button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key]. If you want to assign
a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key].

2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [C Button] and press
the center of the control wheel.

3 Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the
center.

533
 If you press the C button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and the
camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the C button.

Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.

Related Topic
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

534
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to
the function menu.

For details on setting the function menu, refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/function.php

Hint
You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along
with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

1 Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and
then press the Fn (Function) button.

2 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

535
 3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the
function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].

2. Select (Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
3. Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.

(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

536
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the control dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the control dial and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use
to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the control dial/control wheel.

In the following example, the functions listed in the table below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is
assigned to the C (Custom) button.

537
 Operating parts My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO Tv Creative Style

Control dial Av White Balance Picture Effect

1. Press the C (Custom) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.

The icons for the function registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, and turn the control dial to set the aperture value.
3. Press the C button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel/control dial.
4. Turn the control wheel to set the shutter speed, and turn the control dial to set [White Balance].
5. Press the C button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
6. Press the shutter button to shoot.
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Dial / Wheel Lock] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

538
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial/Wheel Setup

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed using the control dial.

Note
[Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

539
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the control dial or control wheel.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

540
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

You can compensate the exposure using the control dial or the control wheel. You can adjust the exposure in a range of
-5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.

1 Set the exposure compensation dial to "0."

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.

Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally assigned can be managed
using the control wheel, and vice versa.

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] in MENU or the exposure settings using
the control dial or the control wheel.

When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] is disabled.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

541
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with
compatible lenses).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame Select:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic
APS-C/Super 35mm

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

542
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter

When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Set MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] to [On] in advance.

1 Select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Shutter].

2 Touch the icon inside the rectangle in the top right of the monitor while the shooting screen is
displayed.

The mark to the left of the icon turns orange, and the touch shutter function is activated.

To cancel [Touch Shutter], touch the icon again.

The touch shutter function is canceled when the camera is restarted.

3 Touch the subject to focus on.

When the subject you touched is in focus, a still image is recorded.

Hint
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.

Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter

The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.

Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During viewfinder shooting
When the shooting mode is set to [Movie]
When the shooting mode is set to [S&Q Motion]
When [Focus Mode] is [Manual Focus]
When [Focus Area] is [Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Expand Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Flexible Spot]
When [Focus Area] is [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the [ Clear Image Zoom]

Related Topic
Touch Operation

543
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

544
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available
when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a
position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

1. Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.

To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch the (Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control
wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.

2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.

1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted
using the focus ring.
To cancel spot focus, touch the (Focus Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible
Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

545
 Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

546
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].

2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

3 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch the (Tracking Cancel) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When shooting movies with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On]

Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

547
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Dial / Wheel Lock

You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Note
When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], [Dial / Wheel Lock] is fixed to [Unlock].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

548
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

549
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images, movies, slow-motion movies, or quick-motion movies to a smartphone and view them. The
application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to
Smartphone] will appear.

2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the
smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.

550
 Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you
want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

While you transfer many images or long movies, we recommend that you supply power to the camera from a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Airplane Mode

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

551
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

When transferring video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-bit-rate
proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Proxy Only:
Transfers only proxy movies.
Original Only:
Transfers only original movies.
Proxy & Original:
Transfers both proxy and original movies.

Note
While you transfer many images or long movies, we recommend that you supply power to the camera from a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Proxy Recording

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

552
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [Cnct.
during Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → desired setting.

Menu Item Details

On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [Cnct. during Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Advance Preparation

1. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.
2. MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → [On].
3. Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.
4. Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote
Power ON/OFF] screen.

Operations

1. Turn off the camera.

2. Select the camera on the [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] screen of Imaging Edge Mobile to turn on the camera.
The camera’s access lamp will light up, and the browsing and transferring functions will become available.

Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera
Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera switches to the shooting mode, and [Send to Smartphone Func.] ends.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings

553
5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

554
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP
servers is required.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.

Related Topic
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

555
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:
Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])
Connection:
Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Always Connected:
Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to
a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a
smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.

Note
If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].

Related Topic
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

556
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/ilce-7c/l/pcremote.php

1 MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.

2 Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct
Method].

Menu item details

PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
PC Remote Cnct Method:
Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]. ([USB]/[Wi-Fi
Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])
Pairing:
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to
[Wi-Fi Direct].
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC
Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])
RAW+J PC Save Img:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].
([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
PC Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The
original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])

How to connect the camera and the computer

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]
Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]

Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information
(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information
displayed on the camera.
557
When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]
Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be
paired in advance.
Select MENU→ (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the
wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.
Select MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge
Desktop (Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the
camera to finish pairing.

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be
released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

558
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

559
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.

1 MENU → (Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact
the administrator of the access point.

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

560
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without the (lock) mark do not require a password.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].

561
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Note
To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

562
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz]. The [Frequency Band] setting only applies to [Send to Smartphone], [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and
[PC Remote] (Wi-Fi Direct).

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Frequency Band] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

Note
If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

563
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed under the following conditions.
[FTP Function] under [FTP Transfer Func.] is set to [On], and a Wi-Fi connection has been established.
[PC Remote] is set to [On] and [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point] under [PC Remote Function], and a
Wi-Fi connection has been established.

To display the QR Code for the MAC address

You can import the MAC address of this camera to a smartphone. Use one of the following methods to display the QR Code on
the screen, and read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on smartphone application.
When the camera is turned off, turn the camera on while pressing the (Playback) button.
Press the (Delete) button on the [Display Wi-Fi Info.] screen.

For details on how to read the QR Code using the Transfer & Tagging add-on, refer to the following support page.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/transfer/l/macaddress/index.php
The Transfer & Tagging add-on is only available in certain countries and regions.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

564
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone], [ Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and
the Wi-Fi Direct connections using [PC Remote Function] with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to
change which devices have permission to connect, reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.

Related Topic
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

565
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth
connection.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location
Info. Link Set..”
If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”

1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.

Related Topic
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

566
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Location Info. Link Set.

You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected
with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting
images.

Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the
following steps beforehand.

1. Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed
the application, update it to the latest version.

2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will
appear on the top page of the application.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing
operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing
and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application
Imaging Edge Mobile.

2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].

3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].

4. : Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.

5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge
Mobile.

6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then
select your camera from the list.

7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

567
 Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.

8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.

Hint
Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is
off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the
smartphone.

When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume
location information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Imaging Edge Mobile.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the smartphone that is already linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge
Mobile.

To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].

The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

568
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/iem/

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

Related Topic
Imaging Edge Mobile
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

569
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately). For details on compatible remote
commander, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the
instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.

1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will
appear.

2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.

3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.

You cannot use the following functions while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Linking location information with a smartphone
Power-save function

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

570
 Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

571
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Edit Device Name].

2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

Related Topic
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

572
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications
during FTP transfer.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [Import Root Certificate].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

573
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Security(IPsec)

Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a Wi-Fi connection.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.

Menu item details

IPsec ([On]/[Off]):
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].

For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.

On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.

Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.

For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

574
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

575
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (Protect) mark is displayed on protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.

Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect
images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

576
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

577
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to clear the check box.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

Related Topic
Display as Group
Deleting a displayed image
Format

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

578
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded still images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find
images.
Combining this function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.
1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.

3 Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center.

4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The
level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

579
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of stars ( ) when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [
Custom Key].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

2 Add a (check) mark to the level of (ranking) that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

580
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The (print order)
icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the check box. To
cancel the selection, press the center again and clear the check box.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the
check box for the date or folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.

Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images

The number of copies cannot be specified.

Some printers do not support the date print function.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

581
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

2 MENU → (Playback) → [Photo Capture].

3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

582
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the (Enlarge Image) button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or
next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [
Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Note
You cannot enlarge movies.

Related Topic
Touch Operation
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

583
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback
zoom mode.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

584
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

585
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cont. PB for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].

2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
PB Speed for Interval

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

586
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

PB Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for Interval].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the control dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for Interval].

Related Topic
Cont. PB for Interval

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

587
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

588
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

589
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.

Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

590
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
Select a group and press the center of the control wheel to play back images in the group.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.

Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [ Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen, the (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.

Note
Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images
cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].

If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

591
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.

Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

592
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want
to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.

Menu item details

Select Dial/Wheel:
Selects the dial or wheel to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method:
Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.

Note
A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].

When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will
only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back
every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial/Wheel].

When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],
or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.

Related Topic
Rating
Protecting images (Protect)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

593
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

594
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Viewfinder Bright.

When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], [Viewfinder Bright.] cannot be set to [Auto]. [Viewfinder Bright.] can only be set to
[Manual].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

595
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

596
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Gamma Disp. Assist

Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range.
Movies with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore displayed in
low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Disp. Assist] function to
reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when
playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].

2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [S-Log2], and with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3]. Displays movies with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when the
gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3], and [Color Mode] is set to [BT.2020].
Displays movies with an [HLG(709)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2] or [HLG3],
and [Color Mode] is set to [709].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays movies after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when movies are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.

Note
Movies with the [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] gamma are displayed with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect or [HLG(709)] effect
depending on the movie’s gamma value and color mode. In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma
setting and color mode setting in [Picture Profile].

[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.

Related Topic
Picture Profile

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

597
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

598
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

599
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display Quality

You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

600
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Power Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

During [ USB Streaming]
While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
During FTP transfer
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

601
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.

Related Topic
Recordable movie times

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

602
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

Note
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or
"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

603
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
follow the steps below to clean the image sensor quickly.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

5 Use the commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding areas.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is (3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

604
 When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

Related Topic
Troubleshooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

605
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates the touch operation.
Off:
Deactivates the touch operation.

Related Topic
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Shutter
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Touch Pad Settings
Touch Panel/Pad

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

606
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Panel/Pad

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when
shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel
operations or touch pad operations.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with
the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

607
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode
Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.

Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.

Hint
In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as
the entire screen.

608
Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

609
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

Note
When the monitor is flipped to shoot a self-portrait, the time code and user bit are not displayed.

How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

610
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format *1)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

611
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which
TV is to be connected.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

612
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60p compatible models)

You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]
or [24p 100M].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].

2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.

Related Topic
Record Setting (movie)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

613
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable
(sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.

Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on
the camera’s monitor.

Note
When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

614
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting
the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information
as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to
recognize the time data.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.

Note
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [
TC Output] to [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

615
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop
recording using the camera.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
(STBY) The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
(REC) The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.

Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].

When you use the [ REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).

When [ TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.

Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

616
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on
the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another
manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

617
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

4K Output Select (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external
recording/playback devices, etc.

1 Turn the mode dial to (movie).

2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p) *:
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording
time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.

When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI
cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [ Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this
case, if you set [ Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially
restricted.
[Face/Eye Priority in AF]
[Face Priority in Multi Metering]
Tracking function

Related Topic
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)

618
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

619
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB Connection

Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.
Also, when you set MENU → (Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct Method] to [USB], set [PC
Remote] under [PC Remote Function] to [Off].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be
connected.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product and a computer or other USB device.

Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

620
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

621
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc. If you use the
supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is selected.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images Available

Playing back images Available

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections Available

Charging a battery pack Unavailable

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

622
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

623
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal
rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

624
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

625
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

IPTC Information

You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata
Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.
* IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:
Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], the (IPTC) icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Register IPTC Info :

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera.

Hint
When you play back images that have IPTC information, the (IPTC) icon appears on the screen.

For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/

Note
Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.

You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.

To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.

Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.

Related Topic
Setting Reset

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

626
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can
enter up to 46 letters.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic
How to use the keyboard

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

627
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Write Serial Number

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

628
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

629
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [ File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can
select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [ File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings (still image)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

630
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[New Folder].

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically
created.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

631
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10000405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2020)

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

632
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

File Settings (movie)

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].

Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

633
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover
Image DB].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].

Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

634
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images
for the inserted memory card.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

635
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].

Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged
battery pack.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

636
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Settings of [Picture Profile] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Related Topic
AF Micro Adj.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

637
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Add Item].

2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Hint
You can add up to 30 items to (My Menu).

Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)

Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using MENU items

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

638
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Sort Item].

2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

639
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Item].

2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.

Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

640
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete Page].

2 Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.

Related Topic
Add Item
Delete All

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

641
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

2 Select [OK].

Related Topic
Add Item
Delete Page

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

642
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic
Add Item

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

643
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Precautions

Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.

On the data specifications described in this manual

The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.

On operating temperatures

Shooting in extremely cold or hot environments that exceed the operating temperature range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.

Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies

Especially during 4K movie shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the
battery pack or replace it with a new battery.

Notes on playing movies on other devices

XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.

Notes on recording/playback

Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.

Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.

When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.

Database file error

644
 If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer, and then format the memory card using this
product.

Do not use/store the product in the following places

In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.

On moisture condensation

If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the
product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that
if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.

Precaution on carrying

Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:
The lens part
The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part

Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.

Notes on handling the product

Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.

On storing

645
 For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.

Notes on using lenses

When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
When you shoot with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Otherwise, the sunlight
may enter the focus inside the camera and cause smoke or fire. Even if the sun is slightly away from the angle of
view, it may still cause smoke or fire.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. That may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.

Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)

Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)

Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)

When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.

Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)

Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)

Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)

When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may
be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.

646
 Notes on the monitor

Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.

On image data compatibility

This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

Services and software provided by other companies

Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.

Notes on connecting to the Internet

Connect the camera to the network via a router, or connect to a LAN port with the same function. If you connect using a
different method, security problems may occur.

Notes on security

SONY WILL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS CAUSED BY
TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR OTHER SECURITY PROBLEMS.
Depending on the usage environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the product.
When connecting the camera to a network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.
The content of communications may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the
signals. When using wireless LAN communication, implement proper security measures to protect the content of
communications.

Notes on the FTP function

Since content, usernames, and passwords are not encrypted using normal FTP, use FTPS if it is available.

Optional accessories

It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.

Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

647
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

On cleaning

Cleaning the lens

Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.

Cleaning the camera body

Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens
mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
* Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.

Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:

Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.

Cleaning the monitor

If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

648
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
follow the steps below to clean the image sensor quickly.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

5 Use the commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding areas.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is (3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

649
 When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

Related Topic
Troubleshooting

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

650
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Number of recordable images

When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.

Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another
one, or delete images from the current memory card.

When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.

The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera. The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing.
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

[ JPEG Image Size]: [L: 24M]

[ Aspect Ratio]: [3:2] *1
(Units: Images)

JPEG Quality/ File Format 64 GB 128 GB

JPEG Standard 8700 17000

JPEG Fine 6100 12000

JPEG Extra fine 3400 6800

RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)*2 1600 3300

RAW (Compressed RAW) 2300 4600

RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1000 2000

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 1200 2400

*1 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when
[RAW] is selected)
*2 [ JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]

Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.

The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

651
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recordable movie times

The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

(h (hour), min (minute))

File Format Frame rate Bit-rate 64 GB 128 GB

100M 1 h 10 min 2 h 20 min

XAVC S 4K 30p/25p
60M 1 h 50 min 3 h 20 min

50M 2 h 20 min 4 h 40 min

XAVC S HD 60p/50p
25M 4 h 30 min 9h

The recording times when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].

The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).

Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.

The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.

Notes on continuous movie recording

High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 120 minutes Approx. 30 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 120 minutes Approx. 20 minutes

652
 When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 120 minutes Approx. 120 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 120 minutes Approx. 20 minutes

HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M/25p 60M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)

The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If (Overheating warning icon) appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.

Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.

Turn the camera off when it is not being used.

Related Topic
Battery life and number of recordable images

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

653
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad

You can use the battery charger (sold separately) and the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country or region where the
power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.

Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

654
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

License

Notes on the License

This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder. However, please
note that Android products may be unable to access the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder on this product. In this case, a
message such as “Unsupported Sony USB drive” may be displayed by the Android product. It is therefore recommended
that you use a device other than an Android product to read the licenses.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are included in the product.
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source code for these software
programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web.
Use the following URL to download it.
https://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

655
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Specifications

Camera

[System]
Camera Type
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens
Sony E-mount lens

[Image sensor]
Image format
35 mm full frame (35.6 mm x 23.8 mm), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera
Approx. 24 200 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera
Approx. 25 300 000 pixels

[SteadyShot]
System
In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system

[Anti-Dust]
System
Charge protection coating on optical filter and image sensor shift mechanism

[Auto focus system]

Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–4 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
AF illuminator
Approx. 0.3 m to 3.0 m (When using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS)

[Electronic Viewfinder]
Type
1.0 cm (0.39 type) Electronic Viewfinder
Total number of dots
2 359 296 dots
Frame coverage
100%

656
Magnification
Approx. 0.59× with 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m–1
Eye Point
Approx. 20 mm from the eyepiece and approx. 17.5 mm from the eyepiece frame at –1 m–1
Diopter Adjustment
–4.0 m–1 to +3.0 m–1

[Monitor]
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
921 600 dots

[Exposure control]
Metering method
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 50, maximum ISO 204 800), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to
12 800, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Movies: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 equivalent, [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to ISO 12 800 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be
set.)
Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)
When using exposure compensation dial: ±3.0 EV (1/3 EV step)

[Shutter]
Type
Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range
Still images (when shooting with the electronic shutter): 1/8 000 second to 30 seconds
Still images (when shooting with the mechanical shutter): 1/4 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB
Movies: 1/4 000 second to 1/4 second (1/3 EV step)
1080 60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
1080 50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)

Flash sync speed

1/160 second (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)

[Continuous shooting]
Continuous shooting speed
(Continuous Shooting: Hi+): Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.

[Recording format]
657
File format
JPEG (DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, MPF Baseline) compliant, RAW (Sony ARW 2.3 format)
Movie (XAVC S format)
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC S ver.1.0 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit)

[Recording media]
SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)

[Input/output terminals]
USB Type-C terminal
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)
HDMI
HDMI type D micro jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack

[Power, general]
Rated input
7.2 V
Power consumption (while shooting)
Using an FE 28-60 mm F4-5.6
When using the viewfinder: Approx. 2.9 W
When using the monitor: Approx. 2.7 W
Operating temperature
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20 to 55°C (–4 to 131°F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
124.0 × 71.1 × 59.7 mm
124.0 × 71.1 × 53.5 mm (from grip to monitor)
5 × 2 7/8 × 2 3/8 in.
5 × 2 7/8 × 2 1/8 in. (from grip to monitor)
Mass (Approx.)
509 g (1 lb 2.0 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
DPOF
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible

[Wireless LAN]
658
WW850128 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
WW384063 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode

[NFC]
Tag type
NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant

[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.1

Frequency band
2.4 GHz

AC Adaptor AC-UUD12/AC-UUE12

Rated input
100 – 240 V , 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated output
5V , 1.5 A

Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100

Rated voltage
7.2 V

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

659
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Trademarks

XAVC S and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

660
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

List of default setting values

The following are the default setting values.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU→ (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] → [Enter].
The items that can be reset using [Camera Settings Reset] are limited. See the following tables. If you select [Initialize],
all the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.

Camera Settings1

Default setting Resettable using [Camera

MENU items
value Settings Reset]

File Format JPEG

RAW File Type Compressed

JPEG Quality Fine

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]) L: 24M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]) L: 21M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]) L: 20M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to[1:1]) L: 16M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]

L: 10M
recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]

L: 8.7M
recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [1:1]

L: 6.9M
recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]

L: 9.2M
recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

Aspect Ratio 3:2

APS-C/Super 35mm Auto

Long Exposure NR On

High ISO NR Normal

Color Space sRGB

Lens Comp. (Shading Comp.) Auto

Lens Comp. (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto

Lens Comp. (Distortion Comp.) Off

661
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

Drive Mode Single Shooting

Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off

Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+

Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30

Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid

Interval Shoot Func. (Silent Shoot. in Interval) On

Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off

/ Recall ―

/ Memory ―

Reg. Custom Shoot Set ―

Focus Mode Automatic AF

Balanced
Priority Set in AF-S
Emphasis

Balanced
Priority Set in AF-C
Emphasis

Focus Area Wide

Focus Area Limit ―

Switch V/H AF Area Off

AF Illuminator Auto

Face/Eye AF Set. (Face/Eye Priority in AF) On

Face/Eye AF Set. (Subject Detection) Human

Face/Eye AF Set. (Right/Left Eye Select) Auto

Face/Eye AF Set. (Face/Eye Frame Display) Off

Face/Eye AF Set. (Animal Eye Display) On

AF Tracking Sens. 3(Standard)

Aperture Drive in AF Standard

AF w/ shutter On

Pre-AF Off

Eye-Start AF Off

662
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

AF Area Registration Off

Del. Regist. AF Area ―

Focus Frame Color White

AF Area Auto Clear Off

Disp. cont. AF area On

Does Not
Circ. of Focus Point
Circulate

AF Frame Move Amt Standard

AF Micro Adj. * (AF Adjustment Set.)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]
Off
or [Initialize].

AF Micro Adj. * (Clear)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]
―
or [Initialize].

AF Micro Adj. * (amount)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]
±0
or [Initialize].

Exposure Comp. ±0.0

Reset EV Comp. Reset

ISO Setting (ISO) ISO AUTO

ISO 50 – ISO
ISO Setting (ISO Range Limit)
204800

ISO Setting (ISO AUTO Min. SS) Standard

Metering Mode Multi

Face Priority in Multi Metering On

Spot Metering Point Center

Exposure step 0.3EV

AEL w/ shutter Auto

Exposure Std. Adjust ±0.0

Flash Mode Autoflash

Flash Comp. ±0.0

Exp.comp.set Ambient&flash

Wireless Flash Off

663
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

Red Eye Reduction Off

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Firing Set.) ―

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Cust. Set.) ―

White Balance Auto

Priority Set in AWB Standard

D-Range
DRO/Auto HDR
Optimizer: Auto

Creative Style Standard

Picture Effect Off

Picture Profile Off

Shutter AWB Lock Off

Focus Magnifier ―

Focus Magnif. Time No Limit

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

AF in Focus Mag. On

MF Assist On

Peaking Setting (Peaking Display) Off

Peaking Setting (Peaking Level) Mid

Peaking Setting (Peaking Color) White

Anti-flicker Shoot. Off

Face Registration ―

Regist. Faces Priority On

Camera Settings2

Default setting Resettable using [Camera

MENU items
value Settings Reset]

Exposure Mode Program Auto

Exposure Mode Program Auto

File Format XAVC S HD

Record Setting (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 24p 60M /25p
4K]) 60M

Record Setting (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 60p 50M /50p
HD]) 50M

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) 30p /25p

664
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate) 120fps /100fps

Proxy Recording Off

AF Transition Speed 5

AF Subj. Shift Sens. 5(Responsive)

Auto Slow Shutter On

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

Audio Recording On

Audio Rec Level 26

Audio Level Display On

Audio Out Timing Live

Wind Noise Reduct. Off

Marker Display Off

Marker Settings (Center) Off

Marker Settings (Aspect) Off

Marker Settings (Safety Zone) Off

Marker Settings (Guideframe) Off

Video Light Mode Power Link

Movie w/ shutter Off

USB Streaming ―

Silent Shooting Off

Release w/o Lens Enable

Release w/o Card Enable

SteadyShot On

SteadyShot Settings (SteadyShot Adjust.) Auto

SteadyShot Settings (SteadyS. Focal Len.) (when [SteadyShot

8mm
Adjust.] is set to [Manual])

Zoom ―

Zoom Setting Optical zoom only

Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T)

DISP Button (Monitor) Display All Info.

DISP Button (Finder) Level

FINDER/MONITOR Auto

665
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

Finder Frame Rate Standard

Zebra Setting (Zebra Display) Off

Zebra Setting (Zebra Level) 70

Grid Line Off

Exposure Set. Guide Off

Live View Display Setting Effect ON

Cont. Shoot. Length Not Displayed

Auto Review Off

Custom Key (C Button) White Balance

Custom Key (Center Button) Focus Standard

Custom Key (Left Button) Drive Mode

Custom Key (Right Button) ISO

Custom Key (Down Button) Not set

Tracking On + AF
Custom Key (AF-ON Button)
On

Custom Key (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

Custom Key (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (C Button)
)

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (Center Button)
)

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (Left Button)
)

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (Right Button)
)

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (Down Button)
)

Custom Key (AF-ON Button) AF On

Custom Key (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (Focus Hold Button)
)

Follow Custom (
Custom Key (MOVIE Button)
/ )

Send to
Custom Key (Fn/ Button)
Smartphone

666
 Default setting Resettable using [Camera
MENU items
value Settings Reset]

Function Menu Set. ―

My Dial Settings ―

Dial/Wheel Setup SS F/no.

Av/Tv Rotate Normal

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp Off

Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus

Func. of Touch Operation Touch Focus

Dial / Wheel Lock Unlock

Audio signals On

Network
To reset the items for [Network] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Reset Network Set.]. These items are not reset
to the default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Send to Smartphone Func. (Send to Smartphone) ―

Send to Smartphone Func. ( Sending Target) Proxy Only

Send to Smartphone Func. (Cnct. during Power OFF) Off

Save/Load FTP Settings ―

FTP Transfer Func. ―

Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Ctrl w/ Smartphone) Off

Ctrl w/ Smartphone ( Connection) ―

Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Always Connected) Off

PC Remote Function (PC Remote) Off

PC Remote Function (PC Remote Cnct Method) USB

PC Remote Function (Pairing) ―

PC Remote Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―

PC Remote Function (Still Img. Save Dest.) PC Only

PC Remote Function (RAW+J PC Save Img) RAW & JPEG

PC Remote Function (PC Save Image Size) Original

Airplane Mode Off

Wi-Fi Settings (WPS Push) ―

Wi-Fi Settings (Access Point Set.) ―

667
 MENU items Default setting value

Wi-Fi Settings (Frequency Band) 2.4GHz

Wi-Fi Settings (Display Wi-Fi Info.) ―

Wi-Fi Settings (SSID/PW Reset) ―

Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Function) Off

Bluetooth Settings (Pairing) ―

Bluetooth Settings (Disp Device Address) ―

Location Info. Link Set. (Location Info. Link) Off

Location Info. Link Set. (Auto Time Correct.)

On
(when [Location Info. Link] is set to [On])

Location Info. Link Set. (Auto Area Adjust.)

On
(when [Location Info. Link] is set to [On])

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off

Edit Device Name ―

Import Root Certificate ―

Security(IPsec) (IPsec) Off

Security(IPsec) (Dest. IP Address) ―

Security(IPsec) (Shared Key) ―

Reset Network Set. ―

Playback
To reset the items for [Playback] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values
even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Protect ―

Rotate ―

Delete ―

Rating ―

Rating Set(Custom Key) ―

Specify Printing ―

Photo Capture ―

Enlarge Image ―

Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position

Cont. PB for Interval —

668
 MENU items Default setting value

PB Speed for Interval 5

Slide Show (Repeat) Off

Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec

View Mode Date View

Image Index 9 Images

Display as Group On

Display Rotation Auto

Image Jump Setting (Select Dial) Dial

Image Jump Setting (Image Jump Method) One by one

Setup
To reset the items for [Setup] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values even
if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Monitor Brightness Manual

Viewfinder Bright. Auto

Finder Color Temp. ±0

Gamma Disp. Assist Off

Volume Settings 7

Delete confirm. "Cancel" first

Display Quality Standard

Power Save Start Time 1 Min

Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard

NTSC/PAL Selector ―

Cleaning Mode ―

Touch Operation On

Touch Panel/Pad Touch Panel Only

Touch Pad Settings (Operation in Vertical Orientation ) On

Touch Pad Settings (Touch Position Mode) Absolute Position

Touch Pad Settings (Operation Area) Right 1/2

TC/UB Settings (TC/UB Disp. Setting) Counter

TC/UB Settings (TC Preset) 00:00:00.00

TC/UB Settings (UB Preset) 00 00 00 00

669
 MENU items Default setting value

TC/UB Settings (TC Format) DF

TC/UB Settings (TC Run) Rec Run

TC/UB Settings (TC Make) Preset

TC/UB Settings (UB Time Rec) Off

HDMI Settings (HDMI Resolution) Auto

HDMI Settings ( 24p/60p Output) 60p

HDMI Settings (HDMI Info. Display) On

HDMI Settings ( TC Output) Off

HDMI Settings ( REC Control) Off

HDMI Settings (CTRL FOR HDMI) On

4K Output Select Memory Card+HDMI

USB Connection Auto

USB LUN Setting Multi

USB Power Supply On

Language ―

Date/Time Setup ―

Area Setting ―

IPTC Information (Write IPTC Info) Off

IPTC Information (Register IPTC Info) ―

Copyright Info (Write Copyright Info) Off

Copyright Info (Set Photographer) ―

Copyright Info (Set Copyright) ―

Copyright Info (Disp. Copyright Info) ―

Write Serial Number Off

Format ―

Select REC Folder ―

New Folder ―

File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series

File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC

File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form

File Settings (File Number) Series

File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―

670
 MENU items Default setting value

File Settings (File Name Format) Standard

File Settings (Title Name Settings) ―

Recover Image DB *
* This is not performed even when you select [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize]. ―

Display Media Info. ―

Version ―

Certification Logo ―

Setting Reset ―

My Menu
To reset the items for [My Menu] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Delete All]. These items are not reset to the
default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Add Item ―

Sort Item ―

Delete Item ―

Delete Page ―

Delete All ―

Display From My Menu Off

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

671
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Troubleshooting

If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.

1 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.

2 Initialize the settings.

3 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/

Related Topic
Setting Reset

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

672
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Warning messages

Set Area/Date/Time.

Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable
backup battery.

Power insufficient.

The image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is low. Recharge the battery
pack.

Unable to use memory card. Format?

The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.

Memory Card Error

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.

Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.

Memory card locked.

You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.

Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.

No memory card has been inserted.

To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.

This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Processing...

When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.

Unable to display.

Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.

673
 Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.

Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".

The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set
[Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].

Unable to print.

You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.

Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.

The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.

(Overheating warning)

You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.

(Database file full)

The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.

(Database file error)

Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.

Image DataBase File error

There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image DB].

System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.

Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.

Image Database File error. Recover?

You cannot record and play back a movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the Image
Database File following the on-screen instructions.

Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.

Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.

Cannot create more folders.

A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.

Related Topic

674
Notes on memory card
Format
Release w/o Lens

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

675
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-7C α7C

Recommended pages

Tracking On + AF On
You can track and keep focusing on the subject for as long as you hold down the custom key.
[Tracking On + AF On] is assigned to the AF-ON button in the default settings.

Looking for valuable information, such as essential points on shooting (Tutorials)

This website introduces convenient functions, ways of usage, and setting examples. Refer to the website when you
set up your camera. (Another window will open.)

ILCE-7C lens compatibility information

This website provides the lens compatibility information. (Another window will open.)

5-021-699-12(1) Copyright 2020 Sony Corporation

676